Home

FMI (V)GL36PN Indoor Fireplace User Manual

1. 5 25 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 0 5 11 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 E ECONOMY fuel a ke Blu ere He ak ee 5 20 Emission control information label 9 10 Emission control system warranty 9 25 Engine Before starting the engine 5 10 Block heater 502 5 27 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants ou dew od oe a 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Changing engine oil 8 10 Changing engine oilfilter 8 11 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Checking engine oillevel 8 9 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Engine cooling system 8 7 Engine oil 6 oie oe eS a ee ee 8 9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil pressure warning light 2 12 Engine oil viscosity aoaaa aaae 9 5 Engine serial number 9 10 Engine specifications 9 7 Starting the engine 5 11 Enter button amp sca aaa eee a 4 4 4 16 Event data recorders 9 27 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide 5 2 F Flashers See hazard warning flasher switch 2 33 Pigeons a2 boos 6 Rte See GH ee 6 2 Floor mat positioning aid 7 5 Fluid Brake fluid lt 2 0 8 nteaneae ee aa 8 12 Capacities and recommended THCWIGDHICANIS lt 2 s a a soa e uk wee a 9 2 Conti
2. 4 Select the Command List key using the NISSAN controller Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 159 Alternate Command Mode command list Phone Command Dial Number Vehicle Phonebook Handset Phonebook international Cal pcoring Gals Outgoing Cals Missed Calls Shows the last 5 missed phone calls Navigation Command Home Address Places Address Book Previous Destination Previous Start Point Minimize Freeway Route Fastest Route Shortest Route Cancel Route Delete Destination Deletes the current destination Birdview Map Changes the Map display to Birdview Planview Map Changes the Map display to a 2 dimensional view 4 160 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems COMMAND ACTION North Up Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen Heading Up Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen Zoom Out lt 1 to 13 gt Changes the map scale to a larger number Guidance Voice ON OFF Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance Information Command Audio Command COMMAND ACTION Turns to the AM band selecting the station last played Turns to the FM band selecting the station last played Zoom In lt 1 to 13 gt Changes the map scale to a smaller number Turns to the SAT band selecting the station last played Turns to the
3. 0e ee eee 4 18 How to select menus on the screen 4 20 How to use the STATUS button 4 20 How to use the INFO button 00 4 20 How to use the SETTING button 4 24 D OFF button 0 cece c neran 4 31 Image viewer if so equipped cee eee eee 4 31 Using the image viewer 2 02 0eeee 4 31 RearView Monitor if so equipped 05 4 34 How to read the displayed lines 4 34 How to park with predicted course lines 4 35 Difference between predicted and actual disian OS eree ecteseenmacrstcteacanuseeecces 4 36 How to adjust the screen 0 cece eee 4 39 Operating PSs i sis pores dee rin ierra nni eeees 4 39 MEWS EAE EEEE LEE E E E EE 4 40 Heater and air conditioner automatic Type A 4 41 Automatic operation 22 024 sc0ee8cateshicvar ex 4 42 Manual operation obo ctien eee atu detene oethe vers 4 49 Operating IDS cx n bore hacaeensanwanenariea ses 4 43 Heater and air conditioner automatic Type B 4 44 Automatic operation oe csevseciwed oie stheeeseeas 4 45 Manual opera ti n 2204 c2404 egaveevereturiseaers 4 45 Operating TDS tern oped anaes ee EENES 4 46 Rear seat air conditioner if so equipped 4 47 ONO pae EEA tence eweneeeer en eaermenss 4 47 Servicing air conditioner s s ees 4 48 Audio SYSTEM 224524 52450 2 02050644485502080scbauae 4 48 e E EE E EA E E E wpe ae AE 4
4. 2 28 Headlight control switch 2 29 Headlights aoaaa aae 8 26 Heated seats oaoa aa a a 2 35 Heated steering wheel 2 35 Heater Heater and air conditioner controls aoao we a RES 4 42 4 45 Heater operation 4 42 4 45 Rear seat air conditioner 4 47 HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 53 Hood release 2 02 0004 3 18 FICK 2 0 ath ae Bea gle a oe A eee eS 2 33 l Ignition Switch Push Button Ignition Switch aaa 5 7 Image viewer aoaaa e 4 31 Immobilizer system 2 25 3 3 5 10 Important vehicle information label 9 10 In cabin microfilter 24 2 ao wk we Ses 8 8 18 Increasing fuel economy 5 20 Indicator lights and audible reminders See warning indicator lights and audible reminders Inside automatic anti glare mirror 3 25 Instrument brightness control 2 32 Instrument panel 2 0 6 2 2 Instrument panel dimmer switch 2 32 Intelligent Key system Key operating range 3 9 Key operation 00004 3 10 Mechanical key 2 2 eee ees 3 3 Remote keyless entry operation 3 13 Troubleshooting guide 3 16 Warning signals 42 40 oh eo we oo 3 16 Interior ght 4 as tee Loe ae ee eee A 2 50 Interior trunk lid release 3 20 iPod Playel pi ra ee ae ch ee eae 4 92 4 93 ISOFIX child restraints 1 23 J Jump sta
5. The Interval Reminder ON key is set to OFF indicator light not illuminated The maintenance interval is set again Where am I Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Traffic Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Weather Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Map Update Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Navigation Version Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Other options For Voice Recognition settings refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system in this section For GPS Position refer to the separate Naviga tion System Owner s Manual 4 23 Settings 8 00 Settings gt Display 8 00 Navigation Volume amp Beeps Display Display Adjustment Adjust navigation settings Settings gt Display Adjustment 8 00 Brightness Contrast Background Color HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed the Set tings screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle Use the NISSAN controller to select each item to be set
6. 00 8 11 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 11 Transmission shift selector lock release 5 16 Control panel buttons 4 16 Brightness contrast button 4 15 4 31 Enter button 004 4 4 4 16 Setting button 4 9 4 24 Without navigation system 4 4 Controls Audio controls steering wheel 4 114 Heater and air conditioner controls ss Ke we eB em ded 4 42 4 45 Rear audio controls 4 116 Rear seat air conditioner 4 47 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 1 ee a 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 10 2 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Corrosion protection 08 7 6 Cruise control 0 0 eee eee 5 18 Cup holders oo 2 ameamua 44 amp eea wk 2 38 D Daytime running light system Canada only 2 31 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWICK aches ot oe Ghee ean eee 2 27 Digital Versatile Disc DVD player 4 84 Dimensions and weights 9 8 Dimmer switch for instrument panel 2 32 Display controls see control panel buttons 4 4 4 16 Distance to empty 2 02205 4 7 4 21 DOOVIOCKSs 6 se ara ee a bw oe Ga e G 3 4 Drive Dells s ccs Gre ane ara wo ee we 8 8 16 Drive positioner Automatic 3 29 Driving Cold weather driving
7. 000e eee 2 6 COMpass display erssisciesrreriai oe weee eres 2 7 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 10 CHECKING DUDS sosi cegunheondaweantan ee Eerik 2 10 Warming IONS ced cesautnesere set Eon EEPE n ae 2 10 indicator ighis 2 cad sgire sexe sec cdeee sameness 2 14 Audible reminders 0000 cece eee eee 2 16 Vehicle information display nsss susanna 2 17 How to use the vehicle information display 2 17 SECU SYSTEMS eeren srasni nne PEAN EEE ee egade 2 24 Vehicle security system 22002eeee 2 24 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 2 25 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 26 Owitch operation sosse tore estersar ti wuni me ni 2 26 Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped d troster SWCD ex canevecnee dwbewntaeeendeneenn es 2 27 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 28 Xenon headlights if so equipped 6 2 28 Headlight control switch sc o0 cs te naa da wena aewen 2 29 Daytime running light system Canada only 2 31 Instrument brightness control 005 2 32 Turn signal SWIHECN 2x cece dennt eee canes tweedeees 2 32 Fog light switch if so equipped 5 2 32 Hazard warning flasher switch 0000005 2 33 PHORM e544 on tieee dew eek pee ons ee we E ere ae eee 2 33 Climate control seat switch if so equipped 2 34 Heated seats if so equipped e cee ee eee 2 35
8. 2 Turn on the hazard warning flashers 3 Park ona level surface and apply the parking brake Move the shift selector to P Park 4 Turn off the engine 5 Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 6 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle AWARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the CVT is shifted into P Park Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for profes sional road assistance Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks 4 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up AWARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury In case of emergency 6 3 LCE0186 LCE0198 Type A Type B Getting the spare tire and tools Open the trunk Remove the floor carpeting 6 4 Incase of emergency e a SS IOTI ITELI LCE0187 Type A LCE0199 Type B Remove the jack 1 and wheel nut wrench 2 Remove the spare tire Lift the spare tire cover from the tool box on the right side of the trunk compartment In case of emergency 6 5 Jack up point and
9. 4 24 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Display settings Select the Display key On the screen above select the Display Adjustment key The Display Adjustment screen will appear Settings gt Display Adjustment 8 00 Display 4 Brightness X Contrast Backgroud Color Push 2 to change modes Brightness contrast Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display background Use the NISSAN controller to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the con trast to lower or higher The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Push the 2 switch to activate the display Display off Select the Display ON key The indicator of the Display ON turns off and the message above will be displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control panel is operated the display turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons Is pressed the display will not automati cally turn off until that operation is finished Oth erwise the screen turns off automatically after 5 seconds To turn the screen on Press the SETTING button and select the Display key and then select the Display ON key or e Press the D OFF button and the mes
10. The rear sun shade operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position The rear sun shade switch is located on the front console To raise the sun shade push the upper side of the switch To lower the sun shade push the lower side of the switch The switch need not be held down A CAUTION Do not place objects such as newspa pers handkerchiefs etc on the screen inlet port Doing so may entangle these objects in the screen when it is extend ing or retracting causing improper op eration or damage to the screen Do not push the sun shade arm with your hands etc as this may deform it Improper operation or damage to the screen may result Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result in improper operation or damage the screen Do not forcefully pull the screen Doing so may elongate the screen Improper operation or damage to the screen may result To avoid personal injury keep your hands fingers and head away from the sun shade arm arm rail and screen inlet port Do not allow children near the rear sun shade system They could be injured Do not pull or push the rear sun shade This could cause improper operation or damage it Instruments and controls 2 49 INTERIOR LIGHT ON DOOR OFF 000 The interior light has a three position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position When the switch is in the ON position the front an
11. Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle the vehicle system may respond differently than expected The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis Thechit selectors noninine P Pai Shift the shift selector to the P Park play and the inside warning chime sounds asion position continuously P The ignition switch is placed in the ACC Place the ignition switch in the OFF When opening the driver s door to get out _ The inside warning chime sounds of the vehicle continuously The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli The NO KEY warning appears on the Place the ignition switch in the OFF display the outside chime sounds 3 times f The ignition switch is placed in the ACC or position and the inside warning chime sounds for ON position approximately 3 seconds When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine When closing the door after getting out of The NO KEY warning appears on the dis The ignition switch is placed in the ACC Move the shift selector to the P Park posi the vehicle play and the outside chime sounds position and the shift selector is not in the P tion and place the ignition switch in the continuously Park position OFF position The shift P
12. 1 42 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained Pre teens and children should be properly re strained in the rear seat if possible Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An in flating front air bag could seriously in jure or kill your child See Child re straints earlier in this section for details Do not lean against the door AWARNING Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bags and roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bags The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact rear impact rollover or lower severity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 43 AWARNING The seat belts the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force Do not allow anyone to place their hand leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do no
13. Average fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1 3 mi 500 m After a reset or connecting the battery Kk cables the display might show Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0 Press the INFO button and select the Fuel Economy key then select the Reset Fuel Eco key using the NISSAN controller Information gt Fuel Eco History 8 00 Reset Interval Latest Fuel economy record Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key then select the Fuel Eco History key using the NISSAN controller The average fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous Reset to Reset period Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 21 Information gt Maintenance 8 00 6000 12000 18000 C t tfi CEt tfi Engine Oil Oil Filter Other Reminder 6000 2000 18000 miles Maintenance items Press the INFO button and select the Mainte nance key using the NISSAN controller the maintenance information will be displayed on the screen Information gt Other Reminder 8 00 6000 12000 18000 TT TT Interval Comi E Reminder Reset Distance 6000 2000 18000 miles Changing the maintenance interval
14. Call Main Menu Gall Speak name Phone Number Speak Digits Special Number Redial Call Back Speak Name A If you have stored entries in the phonebook you can dial a number associated with a name and location See Phonebook in this section to learn how to store entries When prompted by the system say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call The system acknowledges the name If there are multiple locations associated with the name the system asks you to choose the loca tion Once you have confirmed the name and location the system begins the call Speak Digits When prompted by the system say the number you wish to call Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number in this section for more details Special Number For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say Special Number When the system acknowledges the command the system will prompt you to speak the number Redial Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a redial number does not exist the system announces There is no number to redial and ends the VR session Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 125 Call back Use the Call Back command
15. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly Parking brake break in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and or drum rotors are replaced in order to assure the best brake performance This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS AWARNING The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot pre vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remem ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping dis tances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in fron
16. If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires install the new tires on the rear axle Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci dent and personal injury If the wheels are changed for any rea son always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimension Wheels of a different off set could cause premature tire wear degrade ve hicle handling characteristics affect the VDC system and or interference with the brake discs drums Such inter ference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and or early brake pad shoe wear Refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off set dimensions When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS e Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re paired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with out warning e The use of
17. Only touch the base when handling the bulb Never touch the glass envelope Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and or headlight performance e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight assembly High Halogen 9005 HB3 Low Halogen if so equipped H11 Low Xenon if so equipped D2S Park Turn 3457NAK Side marker WY5W Front fog light if so equipped H11 Front personal map lights Glove box light i 158 Vanity mirror light Step light 194 Rear personal lights Door switch illumination LED High mounted stop light Type A LED High mounted stop light Type B LED Trunk light 158 Rear combination light Tail Stop LED Turn signal WY21W Backup reversing 921 Sidemarker W5W License plate light 168 Foot well light 158 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 Headlight assembly Map light Rear personal lights Fog light if so equipped Step light High mounted stop light Type A
18. Pre towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down condition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side Technical and consumer information 9 21 Check your hitch trailer tire pressure ve hicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Steering stability and braking perfor mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions Always secure items in the trailer to pre
19. Select one of the maintenance reminder keys using the NISSAN controller to display the screen to change the maintenance interval You can choose between Engine Oil Oil Filter Tire and Other Reminder Select the Interval key using the NISSAN con troller Touch the or keys or turn the NISSAN controller to choose the desired dis tance To accept the changes press the BACK button 4 22 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Resetting the maintenance interval To reset the reminder schedule distance to O mi km select the Reset Distance key using the NISSAN controller LHA0839 Displaying the maintenance notice re minder Select the Interval Reminder ON key to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati cally at the set maintenance interval The indica tor light will illuminate when it is ON The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au tomatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition the next time the vehicle will be driven To return to the previous display after the MAIN TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed press the BACK button The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met e The Reset key is selected
20. 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 7783 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pend ing Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trade marks of Gracenote BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO if so equipped If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio device that is capable of playing audio files the device can be connected to the vehicle s audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle s speakers 4 110 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Go M1 Ful 8 00 Settings gt Bluetooth Replace Connected Phone Connecting Bluetooth audio To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the vehicle follow the procedure below 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Bluetooth key 3 Select the Connect Bluetooth key Settings gt Bluetooth odm Yu 8 00 Are you connecting a Bluetooth device to use with the handsfree phone system For audio devices please select No Yes 4 A screen will appear asking if you are con necting the device to use with
21. Rear Track P245 45VR18 18 inch tire in mm 62 4 1 585 19 inch tire in mm 62 4 1 585 a Wheelbase sin mm 109877 O O o P245 40WR19 Gross vehicle weight rating Ib kg See the F M V S S C M V S S certification label on Spare tire T145 80D17 Gross axle weight rating i the center pillar between the T145 80R17 ont 7 He driver s side front and rear ear d Speed rating 18 V ao 19 V 19 W 9 8 Technical and consumer information WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve hicle in another country you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi cle s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline There fore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis sion control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district there fore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into an other country state province or district and registered its modifications transpor tation and registration are the responsibil ity
22. ZN pasa FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles kilome ters of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure famil larity with controls and maintenance require ments assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle AWARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE MINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers NEVER dri
23. book if you are currently connected with Phone B List names Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session See the Record Name command in this section for in formation about recording custom voice tags for list entries that the system has difficulty pro nouncing Transfer entry Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to
24. ered If the windows do not close automatically If the power window automatic function closing only does not operate properly perform the fol lowing procedure to initialize the power window system 1 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 2 Close the door 3 Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch 4 Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window and then hold the switch for more than 3 seconds after the window is closed completely 5 Release the power window switch Operate the window by automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete 6 Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other windows If the power window automatic function does not operate properly after performing the above pro cedure have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer MOONROOF if so equipped O e lt LIC1408 AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The auto matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec onds even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the moon roof is canceled Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof push the switch toward 1 To fully close the moonroof push the switch toward gt 2 To open or close the moonro
25. ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated e Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar objects This may result in damage to the climate controlled seat Any liquid spilled on the seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth The climate controlled seat has an air filter Do not operate the climate con trolled seat without an air filter This may result in damage to the system When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi lar materials If any malfunctions are found or the climate controlled seat does not oper ate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer HEATED SEATS if so equipped The front seats are warmed by built in heaters The switch is located on the center console 1 Start the engine 2 Push the LO or HI position of the switch as desired The indicator light in the switch will illuminate The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on 3 When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off A CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheat
26. key using the NISSAN controller the maintenance information will be displayed on the screen 4 8 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems i Information gt Other Reminder 8 00 yo o 6000 12000 18000 Reset Distance Interval Changing the maintenance interval Select one of the Reminder keys Engine Oil Oil Filter Tire or Other Reminder using the NISSAN controller to display the screen to change the maintenance interval Select the Interval key using the NISSAN con troller Use the NISSAN controller to change the maintenance interval To accept the changes press the BACK button Resetting the maintenance interval To reset the reminder schedule distance to O mi km select the Reset Distance key using the NISSAN controller LHA0839 Displaying the maintenance notice re minder Select the Interval Reminder ON key to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati cally at the set maintenance interval The indica tor light will illuminate when it is ON The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au tomatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition the next time the vehicle will be driven To return to the previous display after the MAIN TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed press the BACK button
27. 500 700 and 900 are also supported Examples 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone num bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then ask for the last four digits 4 164 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor mance NOTE When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter O is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero Settings menu The content of the Settings Menu differs when the system is in the Alternate Command Mode Command List Displays the command list for Alternate Com mand Mode User Guide The user guide provides basic instructions for using Voice Recognition and accessing some voice commands NOTE The user guide can also be accessed from within the INFO menu after pressing the INFO button Speaker Adaptation Starts a system training procedu
28. Add or edit phonebook entries PHONE SETTINGS To set up the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to your preferred settings press the SET TING button on the instrument panel and select the Phone key on the display Edit Vehicle Phonebook See Vehicle Phonebook in this section for add ing editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle phonebook Delete Phonebook Delete a phonebook stored on the system Download Handset Phonebook See Handset Phonebook in this section for adding editing and deleting contacts in the handset phonebook Settings gt Volume amp Ringto di Kil 8 00 Ringtone ccccccecses Incoming Call lt J cccecccsces Outgoing Call C CERTS gt Automatic Hold Vehicle Ringtone Volume amp Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone incoming call sound and outgoing call sound When the Automatic Hold option is turned on an incom ing call will be placed on hold automatically after several rings When the Vehicle Ringtone op tion is turned on a specific ringtone that is differ ent from the cellular phone s will sound when receiving a Call Auto Downloaded See Handset Phonebook in this section for information about automatically downloading the handset phonebook Settings gt Bluetooth o MYu 8 00 Bluetooth BLUETOOTH SETTINGS To set up the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to your preferred settings press the SET
29. Also if more than one phone is connected and the name sounds too much like a name already used the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu Call A Phone Number Speak the digits Dial D 1 Press the CS wheel A tone will sound button on the steering Say Call The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say Special Dialing to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters 4 124 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 3 Say Phone Number The system ac knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands 4 Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number try entering the number in the following groups 3 digit area code 3 digit prefix and the last 4 digits For ex ample 555 121 3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group then one two one as the 2nd group and three three five four as the 3rd group For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say Special Dialing See How to say num bers in this section for more information 5 When you have finished speaking the phone number the system repeats it back and an nounces the available commands 6 Say
30. Audio AUX AM These modes are only available when compat ible media storage is inserted into the device This mode is only available when music has been downloaded into the Music Box system TUNE TRACK control switch AM FM Pushthe or M side of the switch to select the next or previous preset station Push and hold the or M side of the switch to select the next or previous station XM Pushthe or M side of the switch to select the next or previous preset station Push and hold the or M side of the switch to select the next or previous category CD e Pushthe or M side of the switch to select the next track or the beginning of the current track CD USB if so equipped with MP3 WMA e Pushthe or M side of the switch to select the next track or the beginning of the current track or w Push and hold the side of the switch to change folders CD DVD USEB if so equipped with com pressed audio files Pushthe or M side of the switch to select the next track or the beginning of the current track Push and hold the side of the switch to change folders or w iPod if so equipped Pushthe or side of the switch to select the next or previous track Music Box hard disk drive audio system if so equipped Pushthe or M side of the switch to select the next or the beginning of the current track
31. Dial The system acknowledges the command and makes the call For additional command options see List of voice commands in this section Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone press the l button on the steering wheel Once the call has ended press the button on the steering wheel NOTE If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone press the button on the steering wheel For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu Call Phonebook Recent Calls Connect Phone When you press and release the amp 4 button on the steering wheel you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu The following pages describe these commands and the com mands in each sub menu Remember to wait for the tone before speaking After the main menu you can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response If you want to end an action without completing it you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is waiting for a response The system will end the VR session Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction any time the system is waiting for a response
32. If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required Instruments and controls 2 5 The ib indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the driver s side of the vehicle A CAUTION if the vehicle runs out of fuel the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips SERVICE the ENGINE light should turn off If the light remains on after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer e For additional information see Mal FUEL GAUGE function Indicator Light MIL later in this section The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank The gauge may move slightly during braking turning acceleration or going up or down hills The gauge needle returns to E Empty after the ignition is placed in the OFF position The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis ters E Empty 2 6 Instruments and controls COMPASS DISPLAY if so equipped This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in dicates the heading direction of the vehicle With the ignition placed in the ON position press the button as described in the charts be low to activate various features of the automatic anti glare rearview mirror Push and hold Feature the sj t N Push button
33. NISSAN dealer For additional information see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the Instruments and Controls section in this manual TILT TELESCOPIC STEERING AWARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident A CAUTION Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort The driv er s air bag inflates with great force If you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of position in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death ina crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel Always use the seat belts AUTOMATIC OPERATION if so equipped Tilt operation Push the switch up or down to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position Entry Exit function The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver s door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily The steering wheel moves back into position when the driver s door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed For more information see Automatic drive posi tioner in this section Telescopic
34. SRS sec tion contains important information concerning the following systems e Driver and passenger supplemental front impact air bag NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag Roof mounted curtain side impact supple mental air bag Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions The side air bags are de signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Roof mounted curtain side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occu pants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the crash protection pro vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occu pant seated a suitable distance away
35. Some car washes espe cially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical deter gents gasoline or solvents Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun light or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become water spotted e Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regularly Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re applying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosin
36. The engine oil may be hot 7 10 Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 22 29 ft lb 29 39 N m Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening then install the oil filler cap securely See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference only Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine Start the engine Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter Correct as re quired Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level with the dip stick Add engine oil if necessary CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Turn the engine off 3 Place alarge drain pan under the oil filter 4 Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 5 Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag A CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remain
37. Theft NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 25 3 3 5 10 Three way catalyst ooa aaa 5 2 10 6 Tire FOC tka eee e d 6 2 Spare Tie ss saaana danara 6 4 8 42 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Tire Chains 242 aa owe kima eee i 8 39 Tire placard gt s s s ms oS eS Re Se 9 11 Tire pressure oaaao 8 31 Tire rotation oaoa aa 8 39 Types of tires oes ain oe he ee 8 38 Uniform tire quality grading 9 24 Wheels andtires 8 31 Wheel tire size 2 000 9 8 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Towing Fiat TOWING s e ab oe ai oi a a a i 9 23 Tow truck towing aoaaa aaa 6 11 Towing load specification 9 19 Trailer towing oaa 9 16 Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 53 Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid ss oe ao owe es we we a ee 8 11 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 0 5 11 Shift selector lock release 5 16 Travel See registering your vehicle in another COURIY s ieie eek OOo eS oe ee Bad 9 9 Trip odometer 2 22 bw Rbk awe ew Bee 2 4 Trunk access through the rear seat 1 5 1 6 Trunk lid lock opener lever 3 19 TUNK NGRE e te Be oh oe a ws ey 2 52 Turn signalswitch 04 2 32 U Uniform tire quality grading 9 24 USB interface Au
38. and 900 are also supported Examples 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone num bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then ask for the last four digits Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor mance NOTE When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter OQ is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero 4 150 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Standard Mode command list Category Command COMMAND ACTION Displays Phone function commands Displays Navigation function commands Displays Vehicle Information Displays Audio commands Displays User Guide Phone Command international Cal Navigation Command COMMAND ACTION Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book Searches for a location by the street address specified and sets a route for continental US and Canada only Sets
39. controls section of this manual STARTING THE ENGINE 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Move the shift selector to P Park or N Neutral P Park is recommended The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions Push the ignition switch to the ON position Depress the brake pedal and push the igni tion switch to start the engine To start the engine immediately push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position f the engine is very hard to start in ex tremely cold weather or when restarting depress the accelerator pedal a little ap proximately 1 3 to the floor and while holding crank the engine Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Push the ignition switch to the ON posi tion to start cranking the engine After 5 or 6 seconds stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK After cranking the engine release the accelerator pedal Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push button ignition switch to start the engine If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure A CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not st
40. designed to reduce vehicle emissions NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy genates such as ethanol MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline If an oxygenate blend other than methanol blend is used it should con tain no more than 10 oxygenate MTBE may however be added up to 15 e If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 5 methanol methyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro sion inhibitors If not properly formu lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or vehicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not avail able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve hicles If any d
41. e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and or dehumidified heating AUTO This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Push the AUTO button on The indicator on the button will illuminate and AUTO will be displayed 2 Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature Adjust the temperature display to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically e A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a mal function 3 You can individually
42. if so equipped AWARNING The adjustable headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against in jury in certain rear end collisions Adjust the headrests properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the adjustable headrest stalks or remove the adjustable headrests Do not use the seat if the adjustable head rests have been removed If the headrest was removed reinstall and properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating position Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the adjustable headrests This may in crease the risk of serious injury or death in a collision 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with adjustable headrests All of the headrests are adjustable E Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable headrest Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or adjustable headrest LRS0888 Components Adjustment To raise the headrest pull it up 1 Adjustable headrest Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the a Adustmentnorch s center of the seat occupant s ears 3 Lock knob 4 Stalks Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 11 4 LRS0889 To lower push and hold
43. key The specified Title Chapter or Group Track will be played Select No VIDEO CD Select the Select No key to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and select the OK key The specified scene will be played Angle DVD VIDEO lf the DVD contains different angles such as moving images the current image angle can be switched to another one Select the Angle key and use the or key to change the angle Angle Mark DVD VIDEO When this item is turned on an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a different angle Menu Skip DVD VIDEO DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the Menu Skip key is turned on Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on CM Skip DVD VIDEO Select the CM Skip key to choose the setting time for CM backward and forward operations Use the or key to choose a setting time of 15 30 or 60 seconds DRC DVD VIDEO DVD VR DRC Dynamic Range Compression auto matically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers DVD Language DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Select the DVD Language key to open the number entry screen Input the number cor responding to the preferred language and select the OK key The DVD top menu language will be change
44. may be displayed incorrectly On a snow covered or slippery road there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line If the battery is disconnected or be comes discharged the predicted course lines may be displayed incor rectly If this occurs please perform the following procedures Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position the predicted course lines may be dis played incorrectly The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a refer ence only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual dis tance between the vehicle and dis played objects When backing up the vehicle up a hill objects viewed in the monitor are fur ther than they appear When backing up the vehicle down a hill objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they ap pear Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 35 1 Visually check that the parking space is safe 3 Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting t
45. names in the phonebook The system recites the phonebook entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the 4 button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session Phonebook phones with automatic phonebook download function NOTE The Transfer Entry command is not avail able when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phonebook List Names Transfer Entry Delete Entry Record Name For phones that support automatic download of the phonebook PBAP Bluetooth profile the Phonebook command is used to manage en tries in the vehicle phonebook You can say the name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for each phone connected to the system Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 127 When a phone is connected to the system the phonebook is automatically downloaded to the vehicle This feature allows you to access your phonebook from the Bluetooth system and call contacts by name You can record a custom voice tag for contact names that the system has difficulty recognizing For more information see Record Name in this section NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone
46. pension system or front end structure This could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mate rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers on the seat that are not specifi cally designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica tion sensor pattern sensor No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system This may affect the front air bag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri Ous personal injury 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Restraint System SRS wi
47. sage resuming display will appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on no amber indicator Background color Select the Background Color key the display color changes between day and night The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 25 8 00 Settings gt Color Theme Black Color theme Select the Display key then select the Color Theme key The Color Theme select screen will appear Select the key for the desired color The appear ance of the background arrows and bars will change for all screens accordingly You can choose a black blue or red color theme 8 00 eack Settings gt Clock Daylight Savings Time Time Zone Eastern 1 6 LHA1241 Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button then selecting the Clock key using the NISSAN controller On screen Clock When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system 4 26 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Clock Format 24h When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated the clock format will change fro
48. the performance of the hard drive NOTE If the hard drive needs to be replaced due to a malfunction all stored music data will be erased re 2 XXXXXX B E XXXXXXX Repeat All on OOO Recording CDs 1 Operate the audio system to play a CD For information on playing CDs see Com pact Disc CD player operation in this sec tion 2 Select the REC key with the NISSAN con troller REC Track appears on the screen NOTE The system starts playing and recording the 1st track on the CD when the REC key is selected Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 97 E XXXXXXX 4 XXXXXX a Ps mmm 1 DISC RPT REC CD 1 10 QSTOP _Text_ The recording process can be stopped at any time All tracks that were played before the CD was stopped are stored Individual tracks can be deleted from the Music Box after the CD is recorded If the title information of the track being recorded is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD the title is automatically displayed on the screen For title acquisition from the hard disk drive music recognition technology and related data are pro vided by Gracenote If a track is not recorded successfully due to skipping sounds the symbol is displayed behind the track number The Music Box audio system cannot perform recording under the following conditions There is not enough space in the Music Box T
49. to a malfunction all stored music data will be erased Track 1 of is Recording CDs 1 Operate the audio system to play a CD For information on playing CDs see Com pact Disc CD player operation in this sec tion 2 Touch the Start REC key REC CD ap pears on the screen NOTE The system starts playing and recording the 1st track on the CD when the Start REC key is selected TUNE 3 Track Track 1 of 15 1 51 Track Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se lected to be recorded to the Music Box hard drive The fast forward and rewind features are disabled while the CD is recording The recording process can be stopped at any time All tracks that were played before the CD was stopped are stored Individual tracks can be deleted from the hard drive after the CD is recorded The system records faster than it plays If the title information of the track being recorded is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD the title is automatically displayed on the screen For title acquisition from the hard drive music recog nition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote To view the details of the track touch the Text key on the screen or use the NISSAN controller The track name and album title are displayed on the screen If a track is not recorded successfully due to skipping sounds the symbol is displayed behind the track number The Music Box aud
50. 0 6 2 4 6 6 4 4 oo no oh oS 1 20 Infants and small children 1 20 Injured Person a 6 6 ae eh ek we we 1 16 Larger children 2 4 4 1 21 Precautions on seat beltusage 1 13 Pregnant women 4 1 16 Seat belt extenders 1 19 Seat belt maintenance 1 19 Seatbelts 0000 008 1 13 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 18 Three point type with retractor 1 16 Seat belt warning light 2 13 Seatback pockets 04 4 2 37 Seats Adj stment s s s as wae Goad a a 1 2 Automatic drive positioner aaa 3 29 Front seals e c s soa ei amp i ao Oe a a 1 2 Heated seats 00 2 35 Rear seat 2 cant dee tiwe ba eae x 1 5 Security indicator light 2 16 Security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 9 25 3 3 5 10 Self adjusting brakes 4 8 20 Service manual order form 9 27 Servicing airconditioner 4 48 Setting button 4 4h s dw be ee oo 4 9 4 24 Shift lock release 2 0000 4 5 16 Shifting Continuously Variable Transmission CVs keen ene Oe ae ao ae 5 13 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 18 Spark plug replacement noaoo 8 17 Speedometer aoaaa a eee aes 2 4 SRS warning label anona aaa 1 53 Starting Before starting the engine 5 10 Jump Staring s e e e i a ek y a a 6 8 Precautions when startin
51. 00 aac outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated Device Name XXXXXXXX Select Device Address XAXXXXXAXX Delete 6 The Device Name and Device Address are CD CARE AND CLEANING displayed on the screen Select the Select key to make this device the active Handle a CD by its edges Do not bend the Bluetooth audio player Select the Edit disc Never touch the surface of the disc key to edit the details of the player such as Device Name Select the Delete key to delete the device Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 113 1 2 3 N LHA1144 Type A Power on and SOURCE select switch Tuning switch Volume control switch A eG XQ WHA1145 3 Type B 1 Power on and SOURCE select switch 2 Menu control switch ENTER button 3 Volume control switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel POWER on switch With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi tion push the SOURCE switch to turn th
52. 00 c cece nnana 3 6 NISSAN Intelligent Key 2 000 0 eee eee 3 7 Operating TAnGerscascecccutwctadeectenveesadwee 3 9 Door locks unlocks precaution 05 3 9 NISSAN Intelligent Key Operation 3 10 How to use the remote keyless entry ETE E oc ctnc eves merece Rede nenetwtaseneex 3 13 Warming SIGNS k dctccanteentadeeebadoaseece 3 16 Troubleshooting guide 2 22 005 3 16 PICO eaa a dy meneesa peewee sok acene ean 3 18 peA e E E Ca E E coat se aoe eaeees ee cae 3 18 Opener operation n e0 dene se nerra 3 19 Secondary trunk lid releaSe nunnana 3 20 Interior trunk lid release 00 cece eee eee 3 20 Fuel filler dOOT sceettece cs stauaeteaucacreseutacads 3 21 Opening the fuel filler door 0e eee 3 21 Fle MGI Cap 2122 scan insave ousece er cess geese 3 21 Tilt telescopic steering 0 002e eee eee eee 3 23 Automatic operation if so equipped 3 23 Manual operation if so equipped 6 3 24 DUN VICON pee tetantaedeseantedeuaeeabase feceees 3 24 Vanity MINOS suastusceetesseteeeeeen tee es seen 3 25 OLS ars kbs te caer paket cee hem wee keene oe 3 25 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror 3 25 Outside Mirrors sssssnsn nunne rran 3 27 Automatic drive positioner if so equipped 3 29 Memory storage function 22 5 3 29 Enty Gxt UNCION scetuenvecusehesteteeeueaees 3 31 OVSIEM ODE
53. 39 P 2 33 A ie oo 3 Steering wheel switch for audio control 6 Security indicator light P 2 24 ilttelescopic steering wheel controls and Bluetooth Hands Free Phone 7 Cruise control main set switches if so equipped P 3 23 System P 4 114 4 1 18 P 5 1 8 2 2 Instruments and controls METERS AND GAUGES 24 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch P 2 36 Outside mirror controls P 3 27 Heated steering wheel switch hide if so equipped P 2 35 E Trunk lid release switch P 3 20 lt MPH eS Rear control cancel switch oh if so equipped P 2 49 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual if so equipped See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Tachometer 7 Engine coolant temperature gauge Speedometer 8 Vehicle information display Warning indicator lights Fuel gauge Odometer twin trip odometer Trip odometer change button o Instruments and controls 2 3 Changing the display Push the change button to change the display as follows Ca Y fy S N MPH 1 D ae quiliiiyy aw ye om Trip A Trip B Trip A Resetting the trip odometer A Push the change button for more than 1 second to reset the currently displayed trip odometer to zero Elapsed time driving distance and average speed information is also available Refer to Control panel buttons in the Moni
54. 48 FM radio r c ption o icrsiessiricricieii irisi 4 48 AM radio reception vaus once cues ceetenteecee eae 4 49 Satellite radio reception if so equipped 4 49 Audio operation precautions 00 0eee 4 49 FM AM radio with compact disc CD changer if so equipped 6 cece eee ees 4 64 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player if so equipped 00 cece eee eee 4 69 FM AM SAT radio with CD DVD player iSO CQMIDDeG sc aceuan sveerecareeceoeenereee 4 75 Digital Versatile Disc DVD Player Operation models with Navigation System 4 84 USB interface models without Navigation System if so equipped 0 cece eee ees 4 87 USB interface models with Navigation OVSteM EE E E E E ET 4 88 iPod Player Operation without Navigation System if so equipped cece eee 4 92 iPod Player Operation with Navigation System if so equipped ccc cece eee 4 93 Music Box Hard Drive audio system without Navigation System if so equipped 4 97 Music Box Hard Drive audio system with Navigation System if so equipped 4 102 Bluetooth streaming audio if so equipped 4 110 CD care and Cleaning is lt cre enad eeeen aware 4 113 Steering wheel switch for audio control 4 114 Rear audio controls if so equipped 4 116 ANONA sicaiueecenteausreaeteen teecaes soca es 4 117 Car phone or CB Tadi0w ts edsudew
55. 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when lt has run for 25 seconds or Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key Pushing the request switch on the driver or passenger door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 ae Co WPD0362 Silencing the horn beep feature If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the Intelligent Key To deactivate Press and hold the and 2 buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and A buttons for at least 2 seconds once more 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See the troubleshooting guide that follows and
56. 8 23 BATTERY REPLACEMENT A CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts WDI0452 LDIO0456 Type A Type B 4 If the fuse is open replace it with an equivalent good fuse 5 Push the fuse box cover to install 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol lows 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 2 Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing 3 Replace the battery with a new one Recommended battery CR2032 or equiva lent Do not touch the internal circuit and elec tric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction Hold the battery by the edges Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity Make sure that the side faces the bot tom of the case 4 Close the lid securely as illustrated 5 Operate the buttons to check the operation See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Pa
57. Beeps 8 00 Switch Beeps i Beep when a button is pushed Switch beeps settings Select the Switch Beeps key The Switches Beeps settings screen will appear With this option on indicator light illuminated a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed Settings gt Camera 8 00 Predictive Course Lines When backing display car width approximation Camera settings Select the Camera key The Camera settings screen will appear When this option is on indicator light illumi nated predictive course lines will be displayed when the RearView monitor is displayed on the screen See RearView Monitor in this section for more information Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 11 Settings gt Clock 8 00 ee On screen Clock E a Clock Format f lt gt E Daylight Savings Time Adjust Clock Display clock in top right corner of display Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button then selecting the Clock key using the NISSAN controller On screen Clock When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Clock Format Choose either the 12h 12 hour clock display or the 24h 24 hour clock display Daylight Savings Time When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated daylight savings time is on To turn off the
58. Brake system 205 5 22 Brake warning light 2 11 Brake wear indicators 2 16 8 20 Parking brake operation 5 18 Self adjusting brakes 8 20 Blakes 6246 eee GREG EES RES i a 8 20 Break in schedule 5 20 Brightness control Instrument panel 2 32 Brightness contrast button 4 15 4 31 Bulb check instrument panel 2 10 Bulb replacement 4 8 27 C Capacities and recommended MUCHIUDICAMIS s 2 6 Ba s aoa a ea 9 2 Car phone or CBradio 4 118 Cargo Nele a saes cote a aa e a a 2 41 Cargo See vehicle loading information 9 12 CD care andcleaning CD changer See audio system CD player See audio system 4 72 4 79 Child restraints 1 20 1 20 1 21 1 23 Precautions on child restraints 1 21 1 27 1 32 1 36 Top tether strap anchor point locations 1 25 Child safety rear door lock 3 6 Chimes audible reminders 2 16 Cleaning exterior and interior 7 2 Clock models with navigation system 4 12 4 26 Clock SOU sasari andunungi 4 12 4 26 C M V S S certification label aaa 9 10 Cold weather driving 5 25 Compact disc CD player 4 72 4 79 Console DOX 2 kad Sa ae ee wee we 2 40 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid
59. Heated steering wheel if so equipped 2 35 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch 2 36 FOWe OUllel lt xsratuocesecneecareteesaceeeresrecee 2 36 DIOLS oc deeeeneeeceaueesaee Sak taceeenneaee eeeed 2 37 Map DOCKEISiuceszencegewesteesedcesagdacekean 2 37 Seatback pockets aii 6 wides ways hecin eee gers ne heel we wah 2 37 Sunglasses holder if so equipped 2 38 CCUG NOJS crtcneowasiou oeeeaec sverneseses ted 2 38 GIOVe DOK ETE cents ecuaerceus E cies 2 39 Console DOL eevenscistcursiscesseneneces ones 2 40 Grocery hookS Se cccndriaadacnipeacesesbadakees 2 41 Cargo net if so equipped cece eee es 2 41 WVINGOWS 26s20e eeeetdaseeneacs keuraataetacnerne 2 42 FPOWElWINGOWS sieeve etree maces ences deat eoes 2 42 Moonroof if so equipped n ununun nrun eee eee 2 45 Automatic MOONTOO sises rorrrsisirarsisiiss ha 2 45 Dual Panel Moonroof if so equipped 2 46 Automatic MOoOnroof 20 gt ondeeded lt ee eer caw ee abuse 2 46 Rear Control Cancel Switch if so equipped 2 49 Rear power sun shade if so equipped 2 49 ItCUOR NOM isc residus nepa esceteutenseenctens nae 2 50 Console light a 4cs5c44neese xe risers bee nsaate 2 51 Ferona MOMS sece ees atu innn aan sees 2 51 PUOU A E E E TE E 2 51 TORK NGL E E E E E E nes 2 52 HomeLink universal transceiver if so equipped 2 53 Programming HOMe LINK 3 020088 e0eeese8 eee ae 2 53 Programm
60. If the parking brake needs adjustment see a NISSAN dealer Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints and headrests move up and down smoothly and the lock knobs if so equipped hold securely in all adjustable positions Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely Check the belt web bing for cuts fraying wear or damage Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer ing system such as excessive freeplay hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the MAX and MIN lines Ve hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require freq
61. OFF with the seat occupied The light will not illuminate when the front pas senger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen ger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is asmall adult or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the air bag status light is not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly Make sure that the child restraint is Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the air bag status light is not illuminated reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat If the passenger air bag status light will not illu minate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly reposition t
62. ON position again between each setting change When the automatic door unlock system is deac tivated the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position To unlock the door manually use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch driver s or front passen ger s side CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors When the lever is in the LOCK position the door can be opened only from the outside NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communi cation systems Do not operate the In telligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unin tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may af fect the Intelligent
63. OPERATING TIPS When the shift selector is shifted to the R Reverse position the display screen auto matically changes to the RearView Monitor mode However the radio can be heard It may take some time until the RearView Monitor or the normal screen is displayed after the shift selector has been shifted to R Reverse from another position or to an other position from R Reverse Objects may be distorted momentarily until the Rear View Monitor screen is displayed com pletely When the temperature is extremely high or low the screen may not clearly display ob jects This is not a malfunction When strong light directly enters the cam era objects may not be displayed clearly This is not a malfunction Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper This is not a malfunction The screen may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction The colors of objects on the RearView Moni tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object Objects on the monitor may not be clear ina dark place or at night This is not a malfunc tion If dirt rain or snow attaches to the camera the RearView Monitor may not clearly display objects Clean the camera Do not use alcohol benzine or thinner to clean the camera This will cause discolora tion To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe wit
64. PSF or equivalent Genuine BRAKE FLUID For further brake fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con tainer Old inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi cle s stopping ability Clean the filler cap before removing Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur faces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added frequently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir periodi cally Add windshield washer fluid when the low windshield washer fluid warning light comes on To fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the windshield washer fluid into the tank opening Add a washer solv
65. Phone 4 156 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voice Recognition gt Phone Yall 8 00 Sy uj Dial Number 4 Vehicle Phonebook j Handset Phonebook j Call History j Intemational Call To exit nold the TALK switch 4 Say International Call NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION Voice Recognition gt Internatio Yul 8 00 Voice Recognition gt Internatio Yul 8 00 ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE 3 International Call 3 011811112223333 The Alternate Command Mode enables control of the Audio Climate Control and Display sys tems as well as additional commands for the D Say the entire number or groups of Help i i i oe i Eaa A Help Vehicle Information Phone and Navigation sys tems With this setting active the system does anual Controls not announce or display the available commands at each step Toeri hold ihe TALK swich Toenk hold ihe TALK swich When Alternate Command Mode is activated an expanded list of commands can be used after pushing the TALK amp switch Under this mode the screen for Standard Mode commands is not available on the display Please review the lus plus Manual Controls G Please continue or say Dial 5 Say 011811112223333 6 Say Dial expanded command list available when this 7 The system makes a call to 011 81 111 mode is active as some Standard Mode com 099 3333 mands are replaced Please see examples of Alternate Comma
66. The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met e The Reset key is selected The Interval Reminder ON key is set to OFF indicator light not illuminated The maintenance interval is set again Settings 8 00 Settings Display Switch Beeps Camera Clock Down Adjust tone amp advanced audio settings Adjust tone amp advanced audio settings tone amp advanced audio settings HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed the Set tings screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle Use the NISSAN controller to select each item to be set Audio settings For audio settings refer to Audio System in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 9 Settings gt Display Auto Day 12 00 Display Brightness Contrast Background Color Toggles display on and off Display settings Select the Display key The Display settings screen will appear Settings gt Display Auto Day 12 00 123456789 Background Color Display S lO MMT Push ENTER to adjust brightness Brightness Brightness contrast Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map background Use the NISSAN controller t
67. The default is set to 132 kbps e Music Box Used Free Space Displays the number of tracks and albums stored on the hard drive The percentage of hard drive space taken up and the amount of remaining recording time left are also shown Automatic Recording When this item is turned to ON the Music Box Hard Drive audio system automatically starts recording when a CD is inserted 4 108 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e CDDB Version Shows the version of CDDB Compact Disc Data Base Gracenote NOTE The information contained in the Gracenote Database is not fully guaran teed The service of the Gracenote Database on the Internet may be stopped without prior notice for maintenance gracenote Ld End User License Agreement USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW Gracenote MusicID Terms of Use This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Soft ware enables this application to do online disc identification and obtain music related informa tion including name artist track and title infor mation Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other func tions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Grace
68. Trunk light High mounted stop light Type B License plate light O Rear combination light ee N ea T a 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A B C or D When replacing a bulb first remove the lens lamp and or cover Y _ Indicates bulb removal t Indicates bulb installation 0 000 Front personal map lights Use a cloth to protect the housing WDI0667 WDI0340 Vanity mirror light Use a cloth to protect the housing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 LDIO341 WDI0670 WDI0343 Step light Rear personal light Trunk light Use a cloth to protect the housing Use a cloth to protect the housing 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the system also displays pres sure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may no
69. a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone con necting procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve hicle You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and connecting instruc tions You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 119 Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being diale
70. a route to a facility near the current vehicle location Address Book Searches for a location stored in the Address Book Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 151 Vehicle Information Command COMMAND ACTION Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information Maintenance Displays Maintenance information Traffic Info Turns the traffic information system on and off Where am Displays current vehicle location Audio Command COMMAND ACTION AM Changes the audio system mode to AM radio FM Changes the audio system mode to FM radio XM Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio Music Box Changes the audio system mode to Music Box CD Changes the audio system mode to CD 4 152 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voice command examples Some basic voice command examples are de scribed here For navigation system commands see the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual Voice Recognition 8 00 Sy 4 Phone qj Navigation Practice 4 information Practice F Audio To exit nold the TALK switch Example 1 Placing a call to the phone 2 The system announces Would you like to number 800 662 6200 access Phone Navigation Information Au dio or Help 1 Pressthe amp switch located on the steer ing wheel 3 Say Phone Monitor climate audio
71. adequate number of phrases have been recorded 10 The system will announce that speaker ad aptation has been completed and the sys tem Is ready The SA mode will stop if e The 4 buttonis pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode The vehicle begins moving during SA mode The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position Training phrases During the SA mode the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases The system will prompt you for each phrase phonebook transfer entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number incoming transfer entry eight pause nine three two pause seven e delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phonebook delete entry 4 130 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems next entry dial star two one seven oh yes no select missed dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on outgoing call three one nine oh two nine seven pause pause three oh eight cancel call back number call star two zero nine five delete phone dial eight three zero five one record name four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phonebook list names call eight oh five four one correction connect phone dial seven four oh one eight previous entry delete dial nine seven two six six call seven six three oh one go back call five six two eight zero dial six six four three seven MANUAL CO
72. adjusting switch For additional information see Seats in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section and Outside mirrors in this section During this step do not place the ignition switch in any position other than ON 4 Push the SET switch and within 5 seconds push the memory switch 1 or 2 The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch After the indicator light goes off the se lected positions are stored in the selected memory 1 or 2 If a new memory is stored in the same memory switch the previous memory will be deleted Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory position memory switch 1 or 2 with the follow ing procedure 1 Follow the steps for storing a memory posi tion 3 30 Pre driving checks and adjustments 2 While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec onds press the 1 button on the keyfob The indicator light will blink After the indica tor light goes off the keyfob is linked to that memory setting With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion press the button on the keyfob The driver s seat and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position NOTE If a new memory position is saved to the memory switch the keyfob automatically re links Confirmin
73. and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and preten sioner systems need servicing The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and or preten sioner systems will not operate in an ac cident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags side air bags curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless it is damaged the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the ve hicle the front air bags side air bags curtain air bags pretensioners and related parts should be p
74. any warnings that may be present Once the screen is selected you have the option of skipping the warning or viewing it in detail Warnings can be present for issues such as an open door or low fuel For more information about potential warnings see Vehicle information dis play warnings and indicators later in this section Instruments and controls 2 21 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators 1 Door and trunk open warning 2 Push warning 3 Low fuel warning 2 22 WARNING WARNING A ee RELEASE PARKING BRAKE WARNING 0 0 RANGE 096 Eh WARNING of0 mr LOW Qi WASHER 4 Low windshield washer fluid warning No key warning Parking brake warning Shift P warning ONO a Engine start operation indicator Instruments and controls 12 NISSAN Intelligent Key insertion indicator 10 11 NISSAN Intelligent Key removal indicator NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator Steering lock release malfunction indicator if so equipped Door and trunk open warning This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk has been opened when the engine is running Push warning After the Shift P warning illuminates the Push warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC position when the shift selec tor is moved to the P Park position See Shift P warning in this section for additional information To turn off the Push warning
75. audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file 4 62 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Requirements for Supporting Video Playback CD CD R CD RW DVD DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DL USB 2 0 Memory CD CD R CD RW DVD ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet UDF Bridge UDF1 02 ISO9660 UDF1 5 UDF2 0 DVD R DVD RW DVD RW ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported File Systems DL Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista based computer are not supported VDF1 5 VDF2 0 packet writing is not supported USB Memory FAT16 FAT32 divx avi Video Codecs DivX3 DivX4 DivX5 DivX6 File T Audio Codecs MP3 MPEG2 5 Audio Layer3 AC3 LPCM ile es aE ast Video Codec ISO MPEG4 Audio Codec G 726 2 Gi a 7 Mops Bit Rates 8 Mbps di av 32x82 720 x 480 Resolution aa 32x82 720x578 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 63 OOO Ast FOLA Op ax O _ AMFM DISC UX Seek AUX IN led GAT TRACK gt gt I 1 amp CD eject button 5 TUNE FOLDER and AUDIO control 2 VOL ON OFF control knob knob Bass Treble Fade Balance SSV 3 Station and CD select 1 6 buttons if so equipped and Beep 4 LOAD CD button 6 AUXIN jack 7 AUX button 8 TRACK button 4 64 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 9 SEEK CAT button 10 DISC button 11 RPT RDM b
76. be replaced if they are damaged Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 15 PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your ab dominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR AWARNING Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0864 Front seat shown Fastening the seat belts Q Adjust the seat See Seats earlier in this section 2 Slowly pull the se
77. cause a fire Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park Fail ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re sult in an accident Make sure the shift selector has been pushed as far forward as itcan go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal 1 2 Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents Firmly apply the parking brake Move the shift selector to the P Park position To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen ter of the road if it moves Place the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion Starting and driving 5 21 POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump driven by the e
78. chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress WD10258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section of this manual for tire re placing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Maintenance and do it yourself 8 39 Wheel nut tightening torque 83 ft lb 112 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tight ened to specifications at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval AWARNING e After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself 1 2 Wear indicator Location mark Tire wear and damage AWARNING Tires should be periodically in spected for wear cracking bulg ing or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be repla
79. controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents ORO a Ze Se LPD0461 Driver s side LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time Turning the key toward the front of the vehicle locks all doors Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door From that position returning the key to neutral where the key can only be removed and inserted and turning it toward the rear again within 60 seconds unlocks all doors Opening and closing windows The driver s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto matic operation at the same time To open the windows turn the driver s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked To close the windows turn the driver s door key toward the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked Windows stop when the key cylinder is released WPD0291 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the lock position then close the door To unlock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the lock posi
80. damage the Intelligent Key Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers Sy SPA1951 Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key which can be used in case of a discharged bat tery To remove the mechanical key release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key To install the mechanical key firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position The mechanical key can be used for operation in the same way as an ordinary key A CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot See Doors in this section and Storage in the Instruments and Controls section of this manual Valet hand off When you have
81. daylight savings time touch the ON key the amber indicator light will go out 4 12 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Time Zone Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic G Manually select time zone Time Zone Select the Time Zone key the Time Zone screen will appear Select one of the following zones depending on the current location by selecting the correct time zone key to enable that time zone indicator light will illuminate for that location Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic Newfoundland Aleutian Hawaii Alaska Oooo IGE min Auto Headlights Sensitivity f E K Auto Headlights Off Delay Adjust Clock Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 12 00 Speed Sensing Wiper Interval O 1 9 DOWN i Select OK to accept the time change i Cabin lighting when unlocking doors Adjust Clock Comfort amp Convenience settings To adjust the time select the or key for the Select the Comfort amp Conv key by using the hour until the desired number is reached Repeat NISSAN controller The comfort and conve the process for the minutes on the line below nience option screen will be displayed To accept the changes made and return to the You can set the following operating conditions by Clocks Settings screen select the OK key highlighting the desired item using the NISSAN controller The amber indicator box at the righ
82. different child restraint webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments 5 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 7 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 1 through 6 FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could
83. driven Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 13 LO f ie Sit upright and weil back A WARNING A WARNING Every person who drives or rides in this The seat belt should be properly ad vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit Failure to do so may times Children should be properly re reduce the effectiveness of the entire strained in the rear seat and if appro restraint system and increase the priate in a child restraint chance or severity of injury in an acci dent Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never put the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its effectiveness Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts If the seat belt warning light
84. either button After 5 seconds the VR session will end and the language will not be changed For color monitor system language change see Language Units in this section Connecting procedure NOTE The connecting procedure must be per formed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 123 Main Menu Connect phone A Add phone Initiate from handset Name phone 1 Press the 4 button on the steering wheel The system announces the available commands Say Connect phone The system ac knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say Add phone The system acknowl edges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Own er s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instruc tions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones When prompted for a Passkey code enter 1234 from the handset The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed The system asks you to say a name for the phone If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again
85. foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P Park to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear posi tions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK or ACC position To move the shift selector Push the button while depressing the brake m pedal gt Push the button to shift Shift without pushing button Shifting After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector from P Park to any of the desired shift positions Starting and driving 5 13 AWARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage P Park A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position 5 14 Starting and driving R Reverse A
86. for operating details illustrated table of contents 0 3 EXTERIOR REAR 0 4 Illustrated table of contents Rear window defroster switch P 2 27 Interior trunk lid release P 3 20 Trunk lid P 3 18 Vehicle loading P 9 12 Exterior trunk lid release request button P 3 13 Replacing bulbs P 8 29 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 21 P 9 3 Fuel filler door P 3 21 Child safety rear door locks P 3 6 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 1 Interior trunk access P 1 5 2 Moonroof if so equipped P 2 45 3 Sun visors P 3 24 4 interior lights illuminated entry P 2 50 5 HomeLink universal transceiver if so equipped P 2 53 6 Interior mirrors P 3 25 7 Glove box P 2 39 8 Cup holders P 2 38 9 Console box P 2 40 10 Front seat P 1 2 11 Rear seat P 1 5 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details 1 9 Shi DA Illustrated table of contents 0 5 INSTRUMENT PANEL 8 Shift paddles if so equipped P 5 15 9 Windshield wiper washer switch P 2 26 ian ns aS 10 Display screen Navigation system Tmo if so equipped P 4 16 11 Display screen Navigation system controls if so equipped P 4 16 12 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 53 2 13 Glove box P 2 39 14 Display screen models without Navigat
87. for you See Precau tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section To adjust pull out the adjustment button and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul der belt anchor into position AWARNING e After adjustment release the adjust ment button and try to move the shoul der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effec tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body size or driving position it is not possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased The extender adds approximately 8 in 200 mm of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur chasing an extender if an extender is required AWARNING Only NISSAN seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the Original equipment seat belts should be used with NISSAN seat belts Adults and children who can use the standard
88. form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint 7 4 Appearance and care If you choose to use a tire dressing take the following precautions e Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil based tire dressing Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is com pletely removed from the tire tread grooves e Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by the tire dressing manufacturer CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth damp ened in mild soap solution then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manu facturer s recommendations Some fabric pro tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens AWARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect
89. in the driver s door opening If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla tion pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check all 4 tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This
90. initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s 4 128 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number Delete Entry Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook After the system rec ognizes the command speak the name to delete or say List Names to choose an entry Record name O The system allows you to record custom voice tags for contact names in the phonebook that the vehicle has difficulty recognizing This feature can also be used to record voice tags to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the system Recent Calls Main Menu Recent Calls Outgoing Incoming Missed Use the Recent Calls command to access out going Incoming or missed calls Outgoing A Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing call
91. is a useful function for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni tion system Settings gt Phone Go fim Ful 8 00 Edit Vehicle Phonebook Delete Phonebook Download Handset Phonebook Volume amp Ringtone Auto Downloaded 1 5 Add or edit phonebook entries Transferring the handset phonebook If your cellular phone supports automatic down loading the system transfers the handset phone book automatically by default To ensure that this feature is activated press the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the Phone key The Auto Downloaded selection should have the amber indicator next to the word ON activated Select the Auto Downloaded key to toggle this feature on or off To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle manually follow these steps 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Phone key 3 Select the Download Handset Phonebook key Once the handset phonebook is transferred to the vehicle it can be accessed by pressing the PHONE key on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel then selecting the Handset Phonebook key Whether the handset phonebook is transferred manually or automatically the process can take up to five minutes to complete depending on the size of the handset phonebook See the cellular phone s owner s manual for more details Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognit
92. it returns to the normal temperature If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and compressed audio files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Cannot play Files with extensions other than MP3 WMA AAC M4A or AA3 cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of charac ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ ing application or other text editing applications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the CD DVD USB device is protected by copyright Poor sound quality Check if the CD DVD is scratched or dirty It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the CD DVD USB device or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts before the music starts playing playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the Music cuts off or skips oe a specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the If an
93. know the appropriate voice command perform the follow ing procedure for displaying the voice command list available only in Alternate Command Mode Press the amp switch listen for the tone and say Help The system will respond by display ing the command list main menu Information gt Command List 8 00 Information Information gt Command List 8 00 Phone Commands Fuel Economy Weather Info Phone Commands Navigation Commands Navigation Commands Maintenance Map Update Information Commands Information Commands Where am 1 Navigation Version Help Commands Traffic Info Help Commands 1 5 1 5 Push the TALK switch to start Voice Recognition Show distance to empty and fuel economy Push the TALK switch to start Voice Recognition LHA1342 LHA1231 Only manual controls such as the touchscreen 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument 5 Select a category using the NISSAN con can navigate the command list menu panel troller The command list for the category is shown As an alternative to the voice command Help 2 Select the Others key using the NISSAN poeta i you may access the command list using the fol controller 6 If necessary scroll the screen using the lowing steps 4 S lectth Voice Recognition key using ihe NISSAN controller to view the entire list NISSAN controller 7 Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen NOTE You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say Help
94. language of the audio Subtitle Choose the preferred language of the sub titles Display Mode Choose between the Normal Wide Cinema or Full display modes Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 91 iPod PLAYER OPERATION WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped Connecting iPod To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen use the USB jack located in the center console Open the protec tive cover 1 on the USB jack in the center console Then connect the iPod specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB Jack on the vehicle If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection its bat tery will be charged while connected to the ve hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position While connected to the vehicle the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle then remove the cable from the iPod iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are compatible iPod Classic 1st through 6th generation iPod Mini 1st and 2nd generation iPod Nano 1st through 3rd generation iPod Touch 1st generation iPhone 1st generatio
95. latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts lug nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and check for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If neces sary adjust the pressure in all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information C
96. later For example if a child is in the front passenger seat the Advanced Air Bag Sys tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula tions is on the seat its weight and the child s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF Occupant classification sensor opera tion can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors The front passenger seat belt sensors are de signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occu pant classification sensor the Advanced Air Bag System determines whether the front passenger air bag should be automatically turned OFF as required by the regulations Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out lined in this manual should not cause the passen ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF however if the occupant takes his her weight off the seat cush ion for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF In addition if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode child restraint mode this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective pr
97. law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle Filled with wiring diagrams illustrations and step by step diagnostic and adjustment pro cedures this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships Also available are genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals for this model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 Technical and consumer information 9 27 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser vice Manual or Owner s Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer For the phone num ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1 800 387 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa tive will assist you Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Unfortunately acc
98. matically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Turnthe 8 fan speed control dial to manually control the fan speed Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Push the gt air recirculation button to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle The C indicator light on the button will come on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 45 The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the Y front defrosting P mode or the front defrosting and foot out let mode Fresh air intake Push the fresh air intake button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment The gt indicator light on the button will come on Automatic intake air control In the AUTO mode the intake air will be con trolled automatically To manually control the in take air push the S amp gt air recirculation button To return to the automatic control mode push and hold the 7 amp 2 air recirculation button or push and hold the fresh air intake button for about 2 seconds The indicator lights both air recirculation and fresh air intake buttons will flash twice and then the intake air will be con trolled automatically Air flow control Pushing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air
99. of contents 1 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 12 2 Engine oil filler cap P 8 9 3 Brake fluid reservoir P 8 13 4 Air cleaner P 8 17 5 Fuse block P 8 21 6 Battery P 8 14 7 Fuse fusible link box P 8 21 8 Engine oil dipstick P 8 9 9 Radiator cap P 8 7 10 Drive belt location P 8 16 11 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 7 12 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 13 NOTE Side covers removed for clarity See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS Anti lock Braking NISSAN Intelligent Fog light indicator System ABS warn Key warning light light if so equipped ing light Front passenger air bag status light Brake warning light Supplemental air High beam indicator bag warning light light blue Indicator SERVICE Malfunction indica light SOON tor light MIL Charge warning Continuously Vari Security indicator able Transmission light CVT indicator light 2 11 Engine oll pressure 2 12 Cantniously Vaii warning light _ able Transmission CVT position indi cator light Low tire pressure warning light Turn signal hazard indicator lights Master warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indica tor light Illustrated table of contents 0 9 MEMO 0 10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system DENS nccncw eeu toake cuc
100. operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the PG position Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illumi nate The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released The daytime run ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position AWARNING When the daytime running light system is active tail lights on your vehicle are not on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Instruments and controls 2 31 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni tion switch is in the ON position The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the AUTO P9 or 2 Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright ness of the instrument panel lights when driving at night position The instrument brightness control will not adjust the brightness when the headlights or parking lights are off 2 32 Instruments and controls TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal Q Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is com pleted the turn signals cancel automatically Lane change signal 2 To signala lane change move the lever up or down to
101. operating system based computer are not Supported file systems supported VDF 1 5 VDF 2 0 packet writing is not supported MPEG1 MPEG MPEG 5 Sampling frequency frequency 8 kHz 48 kHz aye rate 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 WMA 2 es ooo WMA7 WMA8 WMAQ B e 32 kHz 48 kHz versions 1 32 kbps 192 kbps VBR 4 LA E Bit rate 16 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 Folder levels 8 Folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder 126 character e cade 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian Boe eae nner 05 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 07 SHIFT JIS 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 4 When VBR files are played the playback time may not be displayed correctly 4 60 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the CD DVD USB device was inserted correctly Check if the CD DVD is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the player will play correctly after
102. operation Push the switch forward or backward to ad just the steering wheel to the desired position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 MANUAL OPERATION if so equipped Tilt and telescopic operation Pull the lock lever 4 all the way towards you Adjust the steering wheel forward or back ward in direction 2 to the desired position e Adjust the steering wheel up or down in direction 3 to the desired position Lock the steering wheel by releasing the lock lever Make sure the lock lever has returned to its original position to lock the steering wheel in place 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments SUN VISORS AWARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident To block glare from the front swing down the main sun visor 2 To block glare from the side remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side 3 Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed A CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before return ing the extension to its original position Do not pull the extension sun visor forc edly downward VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open MIRRORS AUTOMATIC ANTI GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR The inside mirror is designed so that it au
103. operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and preten sioner seat belt systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all 2 14 Instruments and controls Unless checked and repaired the supplemental restraint system air bag system and or the pre tensioners may not function properly For addi tional details see Supplemental restraint sys tem in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag systems and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible INDICATOR LIGHTS CVT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT indicator light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on for 2 seconds oo Continuously Variable Transmission CVT position indicator light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the indicator light shows the shift selec tor position See Driving the vehic
104. or involved in an accident 8 42 Maintenance and do it yourself AWARNING The spare tire should be used for emer gency use only It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first oppor tunity to avoid possible tire or differen tial damage Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 bar With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH 80 km h When driving on roads covered with snow or ice the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels drive wheels Use tire chains only on the front original tires Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed A CAUTION Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO RARY USE ONLY spare tire Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause dam age to the vehicle Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire grou
105. or the TRACK PPI fast forward button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed TUNE FOLDER knob While playing an MP3 WMA CD turn the TUNE FOLDER knob right or left to scan forward or backward through available folders RPT RDM button When the RPT RDM button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows CD Repeat All 1 Track Repeat 1 Disc Random Repeat All CD with compressed audio files Repeat All 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random Re peat All Repeat All Normal play mode All tracks will constantly play in sequential order 1 Folder Repeat The folder that is currently being accessed will be repeated 1 Track Repeat The track that is currently playing will be repeated 1 Disc Random The tracks on the disc that is currently playing will be played in a mixed order 1 Folder Random The tracks in the folder that is currently playing will be played in a mixed order 4 CD EJECT button Whenthe amp button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When the amp button is pressed while the compact disc Is being played the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition system
106. outlet Air flows from center and side vents 74 Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets Fi Air flows from defroster and foot outlets Q7 Air flows from defroster outlets To turn system off Press the OFF button OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally 4 46 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The sunload sensor located on the top driver s side of the instrument panel helps the system maintain a constant temperature Do not put any thing on or around this sensor REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER if so equipped The rear seat passengers can adjust the climate control system using the climate controls in the rear armrest panel 1 AUTO button 2 button 3 switch For information on canceling the rear seat con troller see Rear control cancel switch if so equipped in the Instruments and controls sec tion CONTROLS Automatic control button Push the AUTO button to activate the automatic climate control system for the passenger com partment Fan control button Pushthe button to manually control the fan speed for
107. phone and voice recognition systems 4 153 Voice Recognition gt Phone Yul 8 00 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yul 8 00 Sy uj Dial Number J Vehicle Phonebook j Handset Phonebook j Call History fF Intemational Call To exit nold the TALK switch 4 Say Dial Number 3 Dial Number E Please say the entire number or groups of numbers Manual Controls To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1334 LHA1335 5 Say 800 4 154 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Kal 8 00 BGE 7J Change Number Please say the next 3 digits Dial or Manual Controls say Change Number To exit hold the TALK switch 6 The system announces Please say the next three digits or dial or say change number 7 Say 662 You can only say a phone number using the Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yul 8 00 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yul 8 00 3 3 4 grouping 7 digits and 10 digits using this command Please use the International 3 800 662 3 800 662 6200 Call command for all other formats and when special characters such as star pound and plus need to be entered n m 47 Change Number Hel aj Change Number Help f you say Change Number during phone number entry the system will automatically G Please say Dial or say Change i Number request that you repeat the number using the 3 3 4 for
108. place and allow the transmission to return to normal op eration or have it repaired if necessary Starting and driving 5 17 PARKING BRAKE AWARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully re leased before driving Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident e Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully engaged Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an accident 5 18 Starting and driving LSD0158 To engage Firmly depress the parking brake To release 1 Firmly apply the foot brake 2 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion 3 Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release 4 Before driving be sure the brake warning light goes out CRUISE CONTROL ACCEL RES COAST SET CANCEL switch ACCEL RES switch COAST SET switch 4 ON OFF switch PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL lf the cruise control system malfunctions it cancels automatically OP AWARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed On winding or hilly roads On slippery roads rain snow ice etc In very windy areas Doi
109. playing the movie file use the gt key Select the key to start playing the movie file or resume the movie file if it has been paused Select the E movie file ppl Next Chapter Fast Forward Select the PP key to skip the chapter s of the disc forward The chapters will ad vance the number of times the key is se lected Press and hold the key to fast for ward the chapter key to stop playing the kK Previous Chapter Rewind Select the M4 key to skip the chapter s of the disc backward The chapters will go back the number of times the key is selected Press and hold the key to rewind the chap ter List Select the List key on the movie file operation screen to display the file list USB gt Settings Audio Settings Select the Settings key to adjust the following settings Audio File Playback Switch to the audio playback mode This item is displayed only when the USB memory contains audio files Play Mode Choose between the Normal or 1 Track Repeat play modes 10 Key Search Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and the specified file or folder will be played Display Adjust the image quality of the screen DRC DRC Dynamic Range Compression auto matically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers Audio Choose the preferred
110. port blinks and the indicator appears on the ve hicle information display See Vehicle informa tion display in the Instruments and controls section In this case inserting the Intelligent Key into the port B allows you to start the engine Make sure the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc tion The front side faces upward and the key ring side faces downward as illustrated To remove the Intelligent Key from the port push the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pull the Intelligent Key out of the port NOTE The Intelligent Key port does not charge the Intelligent Key battery If you see the low battery indicator replace the battery as soon as possible See Battery replace ment in the Maintenance and do it yourself section Starting and driving 5 9 A CAUTION Never place anything except the Intelli gent Key in the Intelligent Key port Do ing sO may cause damage to the equipment Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the correct direction when inserting it to the Intelligent Key port The engine may not start if it is in the wrong direction Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port after the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key f
111. positioner is Operating When the adjusting switch for the driver s seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the seat has been already moved to the memorized position When no seat position is stored in the memory switch When the shift selector is moved from P Park to any other position When the driver s door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled for vehicles with naviga tion system See Comfort amp Convenience set tings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 31 MEMO 3 32 Pre driving checks and adjustments 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Control panel buttons color screen without Navigation System if so equipped 005 4 4 How to use the NISSAN controller 4 5 How to select menus on the screen 4 6 How to use the STATUS button 4 6 How to use the INFO button 0008 4 7 How to use the SETTING button 4 9 MID OFF button 2c cece cence neces 4 15 Control panel buttons color screen with Navigation System if so equipped 5 4 16 How to use the NISSAN controller 4 17 How to use the touch screen
112. pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under inflated tires Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle especially at highway speeds Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve hicle road and traffic 5 6 Starting and driving AWARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire Do not rapidly apply the brakes Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel 1 Remain calm and do not over react 2 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 3 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 4 Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and a
113. prudent manner according to traffic con ditions and obey all traffic laws 1 Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C Al low the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H normal oper ating temperature 2 Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH 88 km h then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds 3 Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 60 MPH 86 96 km h for at least 9 minutes 4 Stop the vehicle 5 Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH 55 km h and maintain the speed for 20 seconds 6 Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times 7 Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH 88 km h and maintain the speed for at least 3 min utes 8 Stop the vehicle Place the shift selector in the P Park or N Neutral position 9 Turn the engine off 10 Repeat steps 1 8 at least one more time If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted repeat the preceding step Any safe driving mode is accept able between steps Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed EVENT DATA RECORDERS EDR This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle s systems p
114. radio station played will come on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 77 The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automati cally change from stereo to monaural reception SAT band select Pressing the SAT button will change the band as follows XM1 XM2 XM3 XM1 satellite if so equipped When the SAT button is pressed while the igni tion switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON When the SAT button is pressed the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the SAT button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on TUNE FOLDER Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to the right or left 44 gt SEEK CAT and TRACK tuning buttons For AM or FM Press the SEEK CAT M4 button or the TRACK gt gt button to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station For XM Press the SEE
115. retread tires is not recommended For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be bal anced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Infor mation Canada in the Warranty In formation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 41 Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter Spare tire TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire Observe the following precautions if the TEM PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used Otherwise your vehicle could be damaged
116. seat and automatic operation steering column will au tomatically move when the shift selector is in the P Park position This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver s seat more easily The drivers seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up when the driver s door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position The driver s seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position when the driver s door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed The entry exit function can be adjusted or can celed See Comfort amp Convenience settings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual Restarting the entry exit function If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the entry exit function will be disabled Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the entry exit function You can also restart the entry exit function using the following proce dure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position The entry exit function should now work properly SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH 7 km h When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive
117. seat belt should not use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured properly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud den stop SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt as sembly should be replaced Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 19 CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources including doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure
118. seat belt system lf the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward facing child restraints be secured to the designated an chor point on the vehicle Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0718 LATCH system lower anchor locations LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system compatible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint 1 23 LATCH lower anchor AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instruc tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious in jury or death of a child or other passen gers in a sudden stop or collision Attach LATCH system compatible child restra
119. sec onds To program your hand held transmitter to HomeLink continue to press and hold the HomeLink button see steps 2 4 under Pro gramming HomeLink while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly indicating successful programming NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc it is advised to unplug the device dur ing the cycling process to prevent pos sible damage to the garage door opener components OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver once pro grammed may now be used to activate the ga rage door etc To operate simply press the ap propriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try h
120. section NISSAN Intelligent Key removal indica tor This indicator illuminates when the driver s door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the Intelligent Key port A key reminder chime also sounds If this indicator illuminates remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with you when leaving the vehicle NISSAN Intelligent Key battery dis charge indicator This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power If this indicator illuminates replace the battery with anew one See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Maintenance and do it yourself section 2 24 Instruments and controls Steering lock release malfunction indica tor if so equipped This indicator illuminates when the steering wheel cannot be released from the LOCK posi tion If this indicator illuminates push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left SECURITY SYSTEMS Your vehicle has two types of security systems Vehicle security system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or trunk lid when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs The system helps deter vehi
121. section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the out ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself TYPES OF TIRES A WARNING When changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type i e Summer All Season or Snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability e Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod els to provide good performance all year includ ing snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summe
122. select the Audio key using the NISSAN controller the audio settings screen will be displayed Select the key or key to change the SSV While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by selecting the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the BACK button 4 70 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Audio Fade CR JJ Speed Sensitive Vol For information on how to use the NISSAN con troller see How to use the NISSAN controller in this section Clock operation For additional information on setting the clock see Adjusting the time in this section CD MP3 display mode While listening to a CD or an MP3 WMA CD certain text might be able to be displayed when CD encoded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or MP3 WMA CD is encoded the following text might be able to be displayed by selecting the Text key Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name CD gt Text i Folder XXXXXXX File XXXXXXX MpP3 Song Album Artist XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name e Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name e Disc display
123. sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alter nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Additional information The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire Starting and driving 5 3 The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After all 4 tires are inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low outside temperature can lower the temperat
124. skip forward Select the stop key MH to end the slideshow and return to the full screen display of the image currently on the screen Settings gt Slideshow Settings 8 00 Slideshow Order Order List LHA1311 Slideshow settings While in slideshow mode select the Settings key The Slideshow Settings screen will be dis played The following settings can be accessed 8 00 No Auto Change ON Settings gt Slideshow Speed Slideshow speed To change the interval of time at which images are changed during a slideshow select the desired interval key The indicator light to the right of the interval will come on to show that it is selected If the option No Auto Change is chosen the slideshow will not change images automatically The slideshow can then only be operated using the manual controls To return to the slideshow screen select the Back key or press the BACK button on the control panel Settings gt Slideshow Order 8 00 Random Order List Slideshow order To change the order in which images are dis played during a slideshow select one of the options If the Random key is selected images will be displayed in a random order during a slideshow If the Order List key is selected images will be displayed in the order in which they are stored on the storage device To return to the slideshow screen select the Back key or press the BACK button on the con
125. snscense take toed es weeane nie 6 3 JUMP SIANG 2 c202ceededecteecdvestasianeedeccewt 2 6 8 PMS StaninOs 2t cSeretueeese saan etaiescueseseses 6 10 If your vehicle overheatS 0 00e eee ee 6 10 TOWING VOUr VENICIC 6iscus ete agveeteateeuvece sete 6 11 Towing recommended by NISSAN 6 12 Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle 6 13 EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure Rapidly push the push button ignition switch 3 consecutive times or Push and hold the push button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds 6 2 Incase of emergency FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pres sure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will acti vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h For more details refer to Warning indicator lights and audible remind ers in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section AWARNING If the low tire pr
126. station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON When the AUX button is pressed the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Ifa compact disc is playing when the AUX button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on TUNE FOLDER Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to the right or left 44 gt SEEK CAT and TRACK tuning buttons Press the SEEK CAT 44 button or the TRACK gt gt button to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pressing the SCAN button again during this five second pe riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station 1 to 6 Station memory operations Six stations can be set for the AM band Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 Eighteen stations can be set for the XM band 6 for XM1 6 for XM2 6 for XMS 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the FM AM select button Or choose the sat
127. the center console 1 NTSC compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary input jacks Audio devices such as some MP3 players can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden tification purposes Red right channel audio input White left channel audio input Yellow video input Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input jacks turn off the power of the portable device With a compatible device connected to the aux iliary input jacks press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the display The output from the device will be played through the display when the vehicle is in the P Park position and the parking brake engaged and audio system AUX gt Menu Display Mode Display AUX settings Select the Settings key using the NISSAN con troller The display mode can be set to Normal Wide or Cinema The volume setting can be set to Low Medium or High Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 83 DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC DVD PLAYER OPERATION models with Navigation System Precautions Start the engine when using the DVD entertain ment system Movies will not be shown on the front display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction Audio is available when a movie i
128. the ON position This Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS sy a RS 8 6 Maintenance and do it yourself Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Fuse block Battery Fuse Fusible link box Engine oil dipstick 9 Radiator cap 10 Drive belt location 11 Engine coolant reservoir 12 Windshield washer fluid reservoir NOTE Side covers removed for clarity SAS oe SS ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant to provide year round anti freeze and coolant protection The anti freeze solution contains rust and corro sion inhibitors Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary AWARNING Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emer
129. the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the weight detected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used If the front passenger air bag is OFF the passen ger air bag status light will be illuminated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illumi nated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflat ing does not indicate improper performance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also contact NISSAN Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner s Manual When a front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken to not inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Front air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with NISS
130. the icon on the to 3 screen changes from E a command Speak Continue to follow the voice menu prompts and speak after the tone sounds until your desired operation is completed Operating tips Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon is B Commands that are available are always shown on the display and spoken through voice menu prompts Commands other than those that are displayed are not accepted Please follow the prompts given by the sys tem If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice Press the switch on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen If you want to cancel the command press and hold the amp switch The message Voice cancelled will be announced Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 149 If you want to adjust the volume of the sys tem feedback push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used When saying the phone number 800 662 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh 500 700
131. the passenger compartment e The fan speed increases each time the button is pushed When the button is pushed while on the maximum fan speed the speed changes to the lowest fan speed Push the AUTO button to return to the auto matic control of the fan speed Temperature control switch Push the ree button or M toraiseor lower the desired temperature for the passenger compartment Changing the temperature with the rear seat controls will activate the DUAL mode on the main climate controls Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 47 SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth s ozone layer Special charging equipment and lubricant is re quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi tioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual A NISSAN dealer is able to service your environ mentally friendly air conditioning system AWARNING The air conditioner system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner ser vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment A
132. the point where the indicator light begins to flash but the lever does not latch FOG LIGHT SWITCH if so equipped To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the position then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position the headlights must be on then turn the fog light switch to the position To turn the fog lights off turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected HAZARD WARNING FLASHER HORN SWITCH The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving g LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights flash A WARNING If stopping for an emergency be sure to move the vehicle well off the road Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Turn signals do not work when the haz ard warning flasher lights are on To sound the horn push the center pad area of the steering wheel AWARNING Do not disassembl
133. the seatback is reclined the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased A CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or damage FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Operating tips The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the battery See Automatic drive positioner in Pre driving checks and adjustments for automatic drive po sitioner operation Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de sired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch forward and move your body forward The seatback will move forward The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be re clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve hicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 WRS0861 LRSO862 Se
134. the wiper Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield A CAUTION Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not operate the washer if the reser voir tank is empty Do not fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir tank with washer fluid con centrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concen trates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield washer fluid reser voir tank Do not use the windshield washer fluid reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid and water REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR if so equipped DEFROSTER SWITCH LIC1387 Type A To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors if so equipped start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on Push the switch again to turn the defroster off The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes A CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the
135. tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section ee WRSO0699 Forward facing front passenger seat step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint or headrest is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed See Head restraints or Adjust able headrest in this section for head r
136. to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water to contact the outlet STORAGE MAP POCKETS LIC0016 SEATBACK POCKETS The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver s and passenger s seats The pockets can be used to store maps Instruments and controls 2 37 A CAUTION e Do not use for anything other than 000 000 sunglasses O e Do not leave sunglasses in the sun glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may damage the sunglasses SUNGLASSES HOLDER if so equipped To open the sunglasses holder push and release A WARNING e Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident 2 38 Instruments and controls LIC 1395 Front CUP HOLDERS A CAUTION Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident To open the front cup holders push the cup holder lid To clo
137. to leave a key with a valet give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me chanical key with you to protect your belongings To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being opened during valet hand off follow the proce dures below 1 Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF position 2 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 3 Lock the glove box and the trunk pass through with the mechanical key 4 Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you See Trunk lid in this section Storage in the Instruments and controls section and Seats in the Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the master keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle These keys have a transponder chip in the key head The master key can be used for all the locks To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone give them the Intelligent Key only not the mechanical key Never leave these keys in the vehicle Additional or replacement keys If you still have a key the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Your dealer can dupli cate your existing key As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle
138. to monitor driver inputs and ve hicle motion Under certain driving situations the system will control braking and engine output to help keep the vehicle on its steered path When the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is operating the indicator in the instrument panel blinks Ifthe ft indicator blinks the road condi tions may be slippery Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF indicator light in the Instruments and controls section Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the system the and EFF indicator lights come on in the instrument panel As long as these indicator lights are on the traction control function is canceled If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy namic Control system off using the VDC OFF switch VDC and the Traction Control System TCS functions will be turned off The indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected The ABS will still operate with the VDC system off When the VDC system is operating you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working prop erly The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clun
139. turned off while the USB memory was playing push the ON OFF VOL control knob to restart the USB memory PP gt gt I SEEK CAT and TRACK Reverse or Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT M4 rewind button or TRACK PPI fast forward button for 1 5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The track plays at an in creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding When the button is released the audio file re turns to normal play speed 44 gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the SEEK CAT button M4 while an au dio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the SEEK CAT button M4 several times to skip backward several tracks Press the TRACK button PPI while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track Press the TRACK button Pl several times to skip forward several tracks If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped the first track of the next folder is played Folder selection To change to another folder in the USB memory turn the TUNE FOLDER knob or choose a folder displayed on the screen using the NISSAN con troller RPT RDM button When the RPT RDM button is pressed while the USB memory is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows Normal 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Random 1 Folder Random Norma
140. use voice commands to switch control navigation audio phone and other functions To start the voice recognition system push the TALK switch on the steering wheel Then say a command after the tone Getting started Before using the Voice Recognition system for the first time you can confirm how to use com mands by viewing the Getting Started section of the User Guide 1 Select the Getting Started key 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller or touching the page down key Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec ognition system If you choose Finding a Street Address Using the Address Book or Placing Calls you can view tutorials on how to perform these operations using Voice Recognition 8 00 Information gt User Guide This test will analyze your speech The system will prompt you to say a phone number After you say the number the system will provide feedback to improve voice recongniticn When you are ready push the TALK switch When you are ready push the Talk switch LHA1327 Let s Practice The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows you to practice saying commands and receive feedback on the volume speed and timing of your speech 8 00 Ps m 836 623 Digits were not recognized correctly Please check analysis of your speech for possible improvements Soft Good Loud Information gt User Guide Volume
141. with the Intelli gent Key Refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in this section Cancel switch When the cancel switch located inside the glove box is OFF the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch or with the Intelligent Key Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 WIC1401 SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE To open the trunk lid from the rear seat 1 A WARNING hole COWS A l Closely supervise children when they are Insert the mechanical key into the trunk com around Cars to prevent them from playing partment access lid lock Fold down the and becoming locked in the trunk where trunk compartment access lid For more in they could be seriously injured Keep the formation on the mechanical key see car locked with the rear seatback and NISSAN Intelligent Key in this section trunk lid securely latched when not in use T I Pull the rear seat trunk release handle ADe ETS LSS BESS LLG The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk To close push the trunk lid down securely 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments To open the trunk from the inside pull the illumi nated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light The handle is locate
142. you should install P245 45VR18 size tires on your vehicle Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use only SAE class S chains Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance Vehicles that can use Class S chains are de signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device tire chains or cables The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the pos sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains In addition drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and perfor mance may be adversely affected Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with
143. 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un desired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any 4 120 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Visteon USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System amp Bluetooth If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds Ifthe fi button is pressed before the initialization completes the system will announce Hands free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traf
144. 2016 kg 100 Ib 45 kg Available for tongue weight 1 000 Ib 454 kg Capacity available for towing 100 Ib 45 kg Available tongue weight 1 000 Ib 454 kg Available capacity 10 tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passen ger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 15 of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to ob tain the proper tongue load Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the Towing load specification chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15 If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10 reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION UNIT Ib kg MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD 1 1 000 454 MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 100 45 1 The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing Capacity TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehic
145. 340 5 X 70 300 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Measurement of Weights later in this section Also check tires for proper inflation pres sures See the Tire and Loading Informa tion label LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR AWARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause personal injury e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could oc cur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause per s
146. 4 7 8 qt 4 qt 4 6 4 1 2 qt 3 3 4 qt 4 3 2 1 8 gal 1 3 4 gal 8 2 See a NISSAN dealer for service Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in the Maintenance and do it yourself section 1 For further details see Fuel recommendation 2 For further details see Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 3 NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at your NISSAN dealer Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI RON 96 1 Engine oil with API Certification Mark 2 3 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 2 3 50 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant or equivalent 50 Demineralized or distilled water Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 4 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent 8 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 5 or equivalent DOT 3 NLGI No 2 Lithium Soap base HFC 134a R 134a 6 NISSAN A C System Oil Type S or equivalent 6 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Antifreeze or equivalent 4 Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 5 Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer 6 For further details see Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 7 For further details see Engine Oil in the Maintenance
147. 6 Press and release the smart or learn pro gram button located on the garage door opener s motor to activate the training mode This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor If the wire originates from under a light lens you will need to remove the lens to access the program button NOTE Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open er s motor and the training light is lit you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7 Use the help of a second person for conve nience to assist when performing this step 7 Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas ing the garage door opener s program but ton quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink button you ve just programmed Press and release the HomeLink button up to 3 times to complete the training 8 Your HomeLink button should now be pro grammed To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers follow steps 2 4 only NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992 D O C regulations required hand held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2
148. 8 00 Select Language English Select Units US Language amp Units Use the NISSAN controller to select the Lan guage amp Units key Select which setting you want to change using the NISSAN controller and selecting either the Select Language key or the Select Units key Settings gt Select Language 8 00 English Fran ais Espanol Select Language Select the English key or the Fran ais key to change the language shown on the display If you select the Fran ais key French language will be displayed so please use the French Own er s Manual To obtain a French Owner s Manual please see Owner s Manual Service Manual Or der Information in the Technical and consumer information section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 29 Settings gt Select Units 8 00 Select Units Select the US mi F MPG key or the Metric km C L 100 km key to change the units shown on the display Voice Recognition For Voice Recognition settings refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system in this section Settings gt Camera Predictive Course Lines Displays the vehicle path when showing the rear camera view Camera settings Select the Camera key The Camera settings screen will appear When this option is on indicator light illumi nated predictive course lines will be displayed when the RearView monit
149. AN advanced air bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the front air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START posi tion Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 47 Front passenger air bag and status light AWARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con ditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the seat seat belt and child restraints is nec essary for most effective protection Fail ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident 1 48 Status light The front passenger air bag status light fois located above the radio The light operates as f
150. CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving Ds Drive sport When the shift selector is shifted from the D Drive position to the manual shift gate the transmission enters the Ds Drive Sport mode Moving the shift selector to the Ds Drive Sport position allows smooth acceleration or decelera tion on a hilly road by moving into a lower gear automatically When canceling the Ds mode re turn the shift selector to the D Drive position The transmission returns to the normal driving mode Manual shift mode When the shift selector is in the Ds Drive Sport position the transmission is ready for the manual shift mode Shift ranges can be selected manu ally by moving the shift selector up or down or pulling the right side or left side paddle shifter To cancel the Ds mode return shift selector to the D Drive position The transmissio
151. CK button while a track is playing to skip to the beginning of the next track If you press and hold the 44 SEEK CAT re wind button or the P gt TRACK fast forward button for more than approximately 1 5 seconds the track will play while rewinding or fast forward ing When the 4 SEEK CAT rewind button or the PPI TRACK fast forward button is re leased the track will return to the normal playing speed The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks For more information on how to use the NISSAN controller see How to use the NISSAN control ler in this section Play mode selection To change to another album or artist turn the TUNE FOLDER knob RPT RDM button Press the RPT RDM button while a track is play ing to change the play pattern as follows Repeat All 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Random 1 Folder Random Repeat All Music Box gt Menu 8 00 2 OSO ONI P E f amsema Pe C Bl ep i Music Box menu There are some options available during play back Select the Menu key then select one of the following that are displayed on the screen if necessary Refer to the following information for each item Music Library There are some options available during playback Select one of the following op tions that are displayed on the screen if necessary e Albums Play tracks in each album The albums are stored in alphabetical order M
152. CONSOLE LIGHT The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control WIC1494 WIC1549 Models without moonroof Models with moonroof FRONT To turn the map lights on press the switches To turn them off press the switches again A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery Instruments and controls 2 51 ON DOOR OFF Lil itl LIC1409 Models with dual panel moonroof 2 52 Instruments and controls LIC1413 REAR To turn on the rear lights press and release the switch 4 To turn the rear lights off press and release the switch 4 TRUNK LIGHT The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened When the trunk lid is closed the light goes off The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the trunk lid is left open unless the ignition switch is in the ON position For bulb replacement procedures refer to Exte rior and interior lights in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER if so equipped The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Universal Transceiver Will operate most Radio Frequency
153. Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Spare tire size if so equipped sess Fads me ENE COLD TIRE PRESSURE TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION e DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES PNEUS A FAOID RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES FNEL ET LE CHARGEMENT e wimg OKT P XXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX psi FRONT SEATING CAPACITY on aitene P XXX kPa XX psi NOMBRE DE PLACES ARRIERE or secours T XXX XX DXX XXX kPa XX psi The combined weight of ocoupants SEE OFRER S MANUAL FUR AD NAL FORMATION 2 and cargo should never exceed XX kg or XX ibs VOIR LE MURUEL DE L UBARER POUR US DE RENSEIGNEMENTS Le poids total des occupants ei du chargement ne doit EMS0A jamais d passer XXX kg ou XXX Ibs LDI2000 Tire and loading information label 4 Cold tire pressure Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 Q Seating capacity The maximum num ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle 2 Vehicle load limit See loading infor km at moderate speeds The recom mation in the Technical and con mended cold tire inflation is set by the sumer information section manufacturer to provide the best bal ance of tire wear vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the vehicle s GVWR Tire size refer to Tire labeling in this section 3 Original tire size The size of
154. ETTING gt RESET GENTER NEXT Reset mode The reset mode can be selected in any screen that allows for preferences to be programmed Once the screen is selected you have the option to reset the selected distances or time to a new setting MAINTENANCE SBACK gt OIL FILTER gt ENGINE OIL gt TIRE gt OTHER GENTER NEXT Maintenance mode The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the following engine oil oll filter tires other Set a desired interval by pushing to high light the maintenance field and pressing The reset mode will open up and allow you to enter the desired distance OPTIONS gt BACK gt LANGUAGE gt UNIT gt DIAL EFFECTS GENTER NEXT Options mode The LANGUAGE UNIT screen will appear when selecting the Language Unit key and pressing Language English or French Unit US mile F MPG Metric km C L 100 km Dial effects This changes effects of the indicator needles when ON The needles in the meter sweep and the ring illumination will be brightened gradually when the engine Is started You can select the language unit or change the dial effects by using the O button and pressing The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button gt SKIP gt DETAIL NEXT WAENTER Warning mode The warning mode can be selected to view
155. For audio devices please select No handset enter the PIN 1234 Exiting screen cancels search Yes Cancel Cancel Connects a phone using Bluetooth LHA1316 LHA1317 2 Select the Connect Bluetooth key 3 A popup box will appear on the screen 4 When a PIN code appears on the screen prompting you to confirm that the connec operate the Bluetooth cellular phone to tion is for the phone system Select the Yes enter the PIN code key The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended cellular phones When the connecting is complete the screen will return to the Bluetooth settings screen 4 136 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook Mm ul 8 00 VEHICLE PHONEBOOK This vehicle has two phonebooks available for your use Depending on your phone the system may automatically download your entire cell phone s phonebook into the Handset Phone book For the details on downloading your phonebook see Handset phonebook in this section If your phonebook does not automati cally download you may set up the vehicle phonebook for up to 40 entries This phonebook allows you to record a name to speak while using voice recogni
156. ING Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth ers to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops the flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury IN CABIN MICROFILTER The in cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors The filter is located behind the glove box Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer 8 18 Maintenance and do it yourself WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Then rinse the blades with clear water If your wind shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using t
157. ISSAN vehicle immobilizer SYSTEM cee ror dopor oa Opo wes 2 25 3 3 5 10 NISSAN voice recognition system 4 145 O Octane rating See fuel octane rating 9 4 OGOncler as eas a e Eo hae a 2 4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants ae He he a we Sk ee ew 9 2 Changing engine oil 8 10 Changing engine oillfilter 8 11 Checking engine oillevel 8 9 ENGNG ON a aa s kha ed i heh Peek 8 9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil viscosity 9 5 Outside mirror control 3 27 Qutside MIMOS ans sa a sa od eck ee a 3 27 Overheat If your vehicle overheats 6 10 Owner s manual order form 9 27 Owner s manual service manual order MORMON sos 4 a aS ae Be a we Bo a A 9 27 P Parking Parking brake operation 5 18 Parking parking on hills gt aaa aaa 5 21 Personal lights a aoaaa e 2 51 Phone Bluetooth hands free SYSICM oa a se ane eee 6 ee eed 4 118 4 133 Power Power door locks 4 04 44 4 2 5 64 44 3 5 Power outlet 204 2 36 Power rear windows 2 43 Power steering fluid 8 12 Power steering system 5 22 Power windows 4 4 562446 d 0 04 a 4 2 42 Rear power windows 2 43 Precautions Maintenance precautions 8 5 Precautions on child restraints 1 21 1 27 1 32 1 36 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 13 Precauti
158. K CAT 44 button or the TRACK PPI button to go to the first channel of the previous or next category SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pressing the SCAN button again during this five second pe riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station 4 78 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 1 to 6 Station memory operations Six stations can be set for the AM band Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 Eighteen channels can be set for the SAT radio 6 for XM1 6 for XM2 6 for XM3 if so equipped 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the FM AM select button or choose the satellite band XM1 XM2 or XM3 using the SAT button 2 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until the preset number is updated on the display and the sound is briefly muted 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations List AM and FM Select the List key using the NISSAN controller or
159. Key system operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system A CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intel ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com puter When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis charged insert the Intelli
160. MPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the engine hood Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 3 Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment 5 If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse 6 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace with only genuine NISSAN parts 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself Lees Rar 65 A lok PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Pull the fuse box cover to remove 3 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller Maintenance and do it yourself
161. MUGN 220s ccs scaeciweeteenicatees eas 3 31 KEYS 1 Two Intelligent Keys 2 Mechanical keys with built in transpon der chip inside Intelligent Keys 3 Key number plate NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle s Intel ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System components 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments Never leave these keys in the vehicle As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when register ing new keys be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it in a safe place such as your wallet not in the vehicle If you lose your keys see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from If you still have a key your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it A CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will
162. Music Box hard disk drive audio system Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 161 Information gt User Guide Placing Calls Help on Speaking 1 8 Displaying user guide You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which con tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument panel 2 Select the Others key 3 Select the Voice Recognition key 4 Select the User Guide key Information gt User Guide 3 8 5 Select an item Available items Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system Lets Practice Initiates a practice session that demon strates how to improve recognition by the system Using the Address Book Tutorial for using the Address Book 4 162 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Finding a Street Address Tutorial for Finding a Street Address Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation Help on Speaking Displays useful tips for how to correctly speak commands in order for them to be properly recognized by the system Voice Recognition Settings Describes the available Voice Recognition settings Adapting the System to Your Voice Tutorial for adapting the system to your voice USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignitio
163. NTROL if so equipped While using the voice recognition system It is possible to select menu options by using the steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice commands The manual control mode does not allow dialing a phone number by digits The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re cent Calls lists To re activate voice recognition exit the manual control mode by pressing and holding the PHONE END _ button At that time pressing the PHONE SEND button will start the Hands Free Phone System Operating tips To enter manual control mode start the voice recognition system and tilt the tuning switch up or down The system will speak Showing Manual Options when manual controls are initially activated To browse the menu options tilt the tuning switch up or down The system will always speak the current menu option De pending on the audio display it will also show the current menu option To select the current menu option press the PHONE SEND f button To go back to the previous menu press the PHONE END button If the current menu is the Main Menu pressing the PHONE END 4 button will exit the Phone system To exit the manual control mode press and hold the PHONE END _ button for 5 seconds Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 131 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice co
164. ODE a aod eee oe EO a 2 52 Warning indicator lights and audible FOMINGCIS lt 0 4m foe we ares HE B S RB 2 10 Lock Child safety rear door lock 3 6 DoerlOckss 5422626 etme a eta ou 3 4 Glove box lock 2 39 Power door locks 3 5 Trunk lid lock opener lever 3 19 10 4 Low fuel warning light 2 13 2 23 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low windshield washer fluid warning light 2 23 Luggage See vehicle loading information 9 12 Maintenance Changing the maintenance interval 4 8 4 22 Displaying the maintenance notice reminder aoao aa a 4 9 4 23 General maintenance 8 2 Inside the vehicle 8 3 Maintenance precautions 8 5 Outside the vehicle 8 2 Resetting the maintenance interval 4 8 4 22 Seat belt maintenance 1 19 SEMIN e aia a eid eek Spe a aa So 4 8 4 22 Under the hood and vehicle 8 4 Malfunction indicator light 2 15 Map pocket aoaaa a 2 37 Meters and gaugeS 4 4 2 3 Instrument brightness control 2 32 Mirror Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 25 Outside mirror control aoaaa aaa 3 27 Outside mirrors o oo a ea 4 3 27 Vany MTOR 24 0 2 ae a a es wee a 3 25 WOOKIOORs a as e a a kaai a y A 2 45 Music Box hard disk drive audio SYSTEM e a i e th o a bee a a 4 97 4 102 N NISSAN Intelligent Key aoaaa 3 7 N
165. ON position and press the LOAD button then press one of the CD insert 1 6 slots Insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided auto matically into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play lf the system has been turned off while a compact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc LOAD button To insert a CD in the CD changer press the LOAD button for less than 1 5 seconds Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select button 1 6 then insert the CD To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer press the LOAD button for more than 1 5 seconds The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer DISC button When the DISC button is pressed with the sys tem off and a compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded with the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play I44 gt gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the SEEK CAT M4 button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times t
166. PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine z O Bluetooth Ml microphone location Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone con necting procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 133 phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one ce
167. Push and hold the or side of the switch to change the playlist Bluetooth Audio if so equipped e Pushthe or side of the switch to select the next track or beginning of the current track ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window A CAUTION e Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it This may cause poor recep tion or noise When cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 117 CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN be sure to observe the following precautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts AWARNING e A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Some juris dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele phones while driving If you must make a call while your ve hicle is in motion the hands free cellu lar phone operational mode if so equipped is highly recommended Ex ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking o
168. RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity systems Is powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed retain the original trans mitter for future programming procedures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section AWARNING Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door gate etc that you are programming Your vehicle s engi
169. SAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks when the iPod is playing 4 96 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 8 00 iPod gt Artists Scrolling menus While navigating long lists of artists albums or songs in the music menu it is possible to scroll the list by the first letter To activate letter index ing perform one of the following Turn the NISSAN controller quickly Press and hold the up down directional ar rows on the NISSAN controller Touch and hold the page up down arrows on the touchscreen To exit the scrolling by letter mode perform one of the following Press the ENTER button on the NISSAN controller Push the ENTER switch on the steering wheel Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds MUSIC BOX HARD DRIVE AUDIO SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped The Music Box Hard Drive audio system can store songs from CDs being played The system has an 800 megabyte MB storage capacity and can record up to 24 hours approximately 360 songs The following CDs can be recorded in the Music Box Hard Drive audio system CDs without MP3 WMA files Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio Hybrid CD DA specification in Super Audio CDs Compact Disc Digital Audio CD DA speci fication in CD Extras e First session of multisession disc Extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C and above 158 F 70 C could affect
170. SB device contains multisession contents Please select item to play Play Movie Contents Play Audio Contents USB INTERFACE models with Navigation System Connecting a device to the USB input jack The USB input jack is located in the center con sole Open the protective cover 1 on the USB jack then insert the USB device into the jack When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack compatible audio and video files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle s audio system and center display screen 4 88 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems When there are both audio and movie files in the USB memory the mode select screen is dis played Use the touchscreen or the NISSAN con troller to select the preferred type of file When there is only type of file in the USB memory that audio or movie operation screen is displayed and starts to play When you play a file with limited playing time the confirmation screen will be displayed before starting to play the file Confirm the playing time and select yes to start playing Audio file operation DISC AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the DISC AUX button to switch to the USB input mode If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode If the system has been
171. SSAN dealer or a professional towing service To move the shift selector complete the following procedure 1 Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion 2 Apply the parking brake For cap removal it must be used or if it is available a plastic trim tool can be used Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm screwdriver remove the shift lock release cover f available a plastic trim tool can also be used Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down Move the shift selector to the N Neutral position while holding down the shift lock release Push the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel Now the ve hicle may be moved to the desired location If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park have a NISSAN dealer check the trans mission as soon as possible AWARNING If the shift selector cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunction ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Accelerator downshift in D Drive position and manual shift mode For passing or hill climbing depress the accel erator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmis sion down into lower range depending on the vehicle speed High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid temp
172. TING button on the instrument panel and select the Bluetooth key on the display Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth system on or off Connect Bluetooth See Connecting procedure in this section for more information about connecting a phone Connected Devices Display a list of the Bluetooth devices con nected to the system Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 143 Edit Bluetooth Info Check information about the device name device address and device PIN Replace Connected Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system This option allows you to keep any voic etags that were recorded using the previous phone 8 00 Settings gt Volume amp Beeps L rccccccsesey Q Guidance Volume PO cccccccccsel bossoesesseeel Incoming Call PO reccccccoee gt Outgoing Call J oce Use volume knob to adjust during playback Audio Volume Ringtone CALL VOLUME Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve clarity if reception between callers is unclear Incoming call adjusting this setting allows you to hear a difference in volume Outgoing call adjusting this setting allows the person you are talking with to hear a difference in volume 4 144 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems To access the settings press the SETTING but ton then select Volume amp Beeps You can also adjust the
173. The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off OFF The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine Is turned off using the ignition switch No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch ACC Accessories This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to the OFF position after 1 hour under the following conditions all doors are closed shift selector is in P Park The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of the following occur any door is opened shift selector is moved out of the P Park ignition switch changes position ON Normal operating position This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories A CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended pe riod This can discharge the battery EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure Rapidly push the push button ignition switch 3 consecutive times or Push and hold the push button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE lf the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis charged the guide light A of the Intelligent Key
174. UDIO SYSTEM RADIO Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the VOL volume ON OFF power knob to turn the radio on If you listen to the radio with the engine not running the ignition switch should be placed in the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influ ences Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the ve hicle may influence radio reception quality Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance ra dio reception These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the qual ity of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when the finest equipment is used These char acteristics are completely normal in a given re ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system 4 48 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Reception conditions will constantly change be cause of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other ve hicles can work against ideal reception De scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your ra
175. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration This is be cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System After the registration process these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle Do not allow the immobilizer system key which contains an electrical transponder to come into contact with salt water This could affect system function 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments DOORS When the doors are locked using one of the following methods the doors can not be opened using the inside or outside door handles The doors must be unlocked to open the doors AWARNING e Always have the doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open ing the doors and will help keep out intruders Before opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or
176. a E E E E 1 2 Front power seat adjustment 00005 1 3 Folding rear seat if so equipped 065 1 5 Head TESUAINIGi caecdvn saree caaeetecescan tears 1 7 Adjustable headrest if so equipped 1 10 Seat Dells os rodea edri Nereu punewenesstcneaeesere 1 13 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 13 Pregnant women 610 do0cd weckan ween danewndes keen we 1 16 Injured DelSONSe es cacccnertenaeen cues ee eesee se 1 16 Three point type seat belt with retractor 1 16 Seat belt extenders 0 0 ccc cece eee 1 19 Seat belt maintenance 000 cece eee ee 1 19 CMA SOlGW ein6605 4205546080064 beS 34 Qamedee ean 1 20 MARIS oc oe eo aa eats toed eee eh dae hehe anes we 1 20 Small CO a gece a yah dene tee nee ee eee ake 1 20 Larger children sheicacemeetersheeeeencee were res 1 21 Child restasse aester ten deturesvedeseuee URNAR 1 21 Precautions on child restraints 05 1 21 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System 000 ccc eee eee eee ees 1 23 Rear facing child restraint installation using LP Cried eeeeeseetacde peeaheeeGrdeermtneecae ae 1 25 Rear facing child restraint installation using the seat DCS occ rircsionsrisri tE cebaeeawusews 1 27 Forward facing child restraint installation USING LATOR sieges rsisi pe ENE E E e 1 30 Forward facing child restraint installation using the seat beltS 0 cece eee eee ee 1 32 Installing to
177. a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 iia tic SAFETY DEFECTS US only If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could Cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addi tion to notifying NISSAN If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or NISSAN To contact NHTSA you may call the Ve hicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov You may no
178. a brake pad requires re placement a high pitched scraping or screech ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occa sional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For more information regarding brake inspections see the appropriate mainte nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide FUSES Two types of fuses are used Type is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment Type is used in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration This will not affect the performance of the fuse Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under hood fuse boxes Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes ENGINE CO
179. a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following procedures 1 Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds Instruments and controls 2 25 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys tem CONT ASSY IMMOBILIZER ANT ASSY IMMOBILIZER This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including inter ference that may cause undesired opera tion of the device CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER S AUTHORITY TO OPER ATE THE EQUIPMENT 2 26 Instruments and controls LICO474 Security indicator light The security indicator light
180. ack of it is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing con dition should get fresh air promptly Side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat ing positions They can help save lives and re duce serious injuries However an inflating side air bag and curtain air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system practical from the door finishers and side roof rails The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants Because of this the force of the side air bag and curtain side impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too clos
181. act with water or salt water This could affect the system function Do not drop the Intelligent Key e Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli gent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 4 When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 31 50 in 80 cm from each request switc
182. ademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are compatible iPod 5th Generation version 1 2 1 iPod Classic version 1 1 1 iPod Touch version 2 0 0 iPod Nano 1st generation version 1 3 1 iPod Nano 2nd generation version 1 1 3 iPod Nano 3rd generation version 1 1 iPod Nano 4thgeneration version 1 0 2 Some features of this iPod may not be fully functional Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above 4 94 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 8 00 Q Artist XXXXXX Album XXXXXX Track XXXXXX Shuffle Songs Repeat All Track 1 of 23 o 2 10 Menu hil Audio main operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Press the DISC AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the iPod DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and the iPod connected the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode iPod gt Music 8 00 Playlists Artists LHA1398 Interface The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod
183. after the door unlock operation is performed once Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Select to turn on or turn off the door lock unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch Lift Steering Wheel on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position the steering wheel moves to the previous position Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the driver s seat moving backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position the driver s seat moves to the previous position 4 14 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Return All Settings to Default Select to change all the comfort and convenience systems to their default settings Settings gt Language Units 12 00 Settings gt Select Language Select Language English Select Units Ef Fran ais Select language Select system language Language Units Select Language Use the NISSAN controller to select the Lan Select the English key the Fran ais key or the guage Units key Select which setting you want Espa ol key to change the language shown on to change using the NISSAN c
184. again for about 1 sec ond to change settings button for about g ings Compass display toggles on off Compass zone can be changed to 8 seconds correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode For information about the automatic anti glare feature refer to Automatic anti glare rearview mirror in the Pre driving checks and adjust ments section You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles COMPASS DISPLAY Push the button for about 1 second when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the outside temperature and compass direction display on or off The display will indicate the direction that the vehicle is heading N North E East S South W West If the display reads C calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH 8 km h Instruments and controls 2 7 2 8 Instruments and controls Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geo graphical north is known as variance In some areas this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens 1 Press and hold the button for about 8 seconds The current zone number will ap pear in the dis
185. age yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue load use the following procedure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer 3 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue load To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing Capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat ings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed on a scale including passengers cargo and hitch 4 446 Ib 2016 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certification label 4 546 Ib 2062 kg Maximum Towing Load from Towing Load Specification chart 1 000 lb 454 kg GVWR GVW 4 546 lb 2062 kg 4 446 lb
186. ailers Obey the local speed limits Check your hitch trailer wiring harness con nections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break When launching a boat don t allow the wa ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer transmission fluid should be changed more frequently For additional information see the Mainte nance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home Technical and consumer information 9 23 A CAUTION Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage Whenever flat towing your vehicle al ways tow forward never backward e DO NOT tow any automatic transmis sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual Continuously Variable Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission an
187. anada in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a dam aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when per forming periodic maintenance cleaning the ve hicle etc Additional information on the following items with an is found later in this sec tion Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera tion If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur ther than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see a NISSAN dealer immediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied Continuously Variable Transmission CVT P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P Park position without applying any brakes Parking brake Check the parking brake opera tion regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied
188. and audible FOMINS i 4 co 2 he aR od ew 2 10 Warning lights 2 ia one 2 ae ow oe 2 10 Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 26 Weights See dimensions and weights 9 8 Wheels andtires 25 8 31 Wheel tire size 2 0 22002 ee eee 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country so oS wee 6 ba Sw teso 9 9 Window washer fluid 8 13 Windows Locking passengers windows 2 43 Power rear windows 2 43 Power windows 4 2 42 Rear power windows 2 43 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 26 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 26 Wiper blades 42 4 he ke we we hw amp os 8 19 10 7 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL NISSAN recommends the use of premium un leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research octane number 96 If unleaded premium gaso line is not available you may use unleaded regu lar gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number Research octane number 91 but you may notice a decrease in performance A CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your ve
189. and do it yourself section of this manual 8 DEXRON VI type ATF may be used 9 2 Technical and consumer information FUEL RECOMMENDATION NISSAN recommends the use of premium un leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research octane number 96 If unleaded premium gaso line is not available you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number Research octane number 91 but you may notice a decrease in performance A CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC specifi cations where it is available Many of the automo bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu lated gasolines These gasolines are specially
190. and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warran ties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or cat egories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its online services at any time Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 101 GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Copyright Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technol ogy and related content delivery For more infor mation visit ww
191. ands etc inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof Instruments and controls 2 45 When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front the moonroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down the moonroof will im mediately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re peats opening or tilting up the moonroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the moonroof will fully close gradually Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof AWARNING In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing 2 46 Instruments and controls A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for ward or backward If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof DUAL PANEL MOONROOF if so equipped Q OPEN tr 2 CLOSE A Iwata AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switc
192. ange intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor rect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war ranty Technical and consumer information 9 5 Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes repeated short distance driving at cold out side temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger ant HFC 134a R 134a and NISSAN A C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents 9 6 Technical and consumer information A CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condi
193. anges in crosswinds that could affect ve hicle handling Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow This combination will help stabilize the ve hicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road ina safe area Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal anced as described earlier in this section Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires con siderably more distance than normal pass ing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans mission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer Anticipate stops and brake gradually NISSAN recommends that the cruise con trol not be used while towing a trailer Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing tr
194. appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle s drive wheels Always follow the dolly manufac turer s recommendations when using their prod uct UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B and C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con crete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 9 24 Technical and consumer information AWARNING The traction grade as
195. argo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or CAUTION shifting In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal Do not apply a total load of more than 20 m Ibs 9 kg to a single grocery hook ay Be sure to secure all four hooks into the retainers The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 Ibs 13 6 kg or the net may not stay secured instruments and controls 2 41 WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS AWARNING e Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows e Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window Unattended chil dren could become involved in serious To install a cargo net attach the net to the retain accidents ers Window lock button J The power windows operate when the ignition 2 Power door lock switch To remove a cargo net detach the net from the switch is placed in the ON position or for about 3 Driver s side automatic window switch retainers 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in 4 Front passenger s side automatic win the OFF position If the driver s or passenger s dow switch door is opened during this period of about 45 5 Left rear passenger s side automatic seconds power to the win
196. art push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Warm up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec onds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the en gine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start 5 To stop the engine shift the shift selector to the P Park position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position DRIVING THE VEHICLE CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT Starting and driving 5 11 5 12 Starting and driving AWARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neu tral to R Reverse D Drive Ds Drive Sport or M Manual shift mode Al ways depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control Never shift to P Park or R Reverse while the vehicle is moving This could cause an accident A CAUTION When stopping the vehicle on an uph
197. ase the light will start blink ing or the color of the light will be come reddish If one or more of the above signs appear contact a NISSAN dealer A CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery WIC1435 WIC1436 Type A Type B HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting When turning the switch to the PG posi tion the front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights come on 2 When turning the switch to the 2 posi tion the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on Instruments and controls 2 29 Autolight system The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically The autolight system can Turn on the headlights front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights au tomatically when it is dark Turn off all the lights when it is light Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed 2 30 Instruments and controls To turn on the autolight system 1 Place the headlight switch in the AUTO po sition 1 2 Place ignition in the ON position 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off Initially if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes If another door is opened during the 5 min
198. asher fluid n a aaa eaaa 8 13 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 8 13 BAU E EA E E E cee ceoer a aet 8 14 JUMP Saring stem egecenneeeteeensseeeeen ees a 8 15 Variable voltage control system 00 sees 8 15 DING Dalle ccatrenccacedetendeve Osten acubenserseoue 8 16 SPAK PUGS serps ier EPACAR EARE seen ENES 8 17 Replacing spark plugS ss lt dccnececeaebeteaneeesa 8 17 Pal ClOSNel onces ube tng n a E a 8 17 In cabin microfilter ssaaaanuueranraaaa 8 18 Windshield wiper blades s n sueann 8 19 EA eaer EE vie E 8 19 PReDIOCING een ces cetera E 8 19 EREL e E E T E E E teeeeeace 8 20 Dee E E E 8 21 Engine compartment cnsesnde ses cee seae cesses 8 21 Passenger compartment 0e cece eee 8 23 Battery replacement 000 c cece eee eens 8 24 NISSAN Intelligent Key annuau 8 25 E oaie aeuseieaeneeceueanesteepewesutereseueieawens 8 26 PICHON Soss zoenn naa n Ep aa e E E 8 26 Exterior and interior lights 8 27 Wheels and tireS 221064 c0anaSetaee neo saneedsadens 8 31 Tire DiC Sse Saeed od eee oe ere eee sees 8 31 Tre IAD GING oteren cesta see E S ess 8 35 Types OfO Scri cccemeueesechereeteneeeeaeusse 8 38 THO Gla seccecteeeundss oaaceeeeace na re 8 39 Changing wheels and tires 00 cee eee eee 8 39 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini mum maintenance requirements with long ser vice intervals to save you both time and money Howe
199. at belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage The retractor is designed to lock dur ing a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat Ifthe seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the re tractor 3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown 4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three point seat belts have two modes of operation Emergency Locking Retractor ELR Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted The seat
200. at lifter driver s seat Manual if so equipped Power if so equipped Push the front or rear end of the switch up or Lumbar support driver S seat down to adjust the angle and height of the seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back cushion support to the driver Move the lever up or down manual or move the switch forward or backward power to adjust the seat lumbar area 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0238 Interior trunk access For models without a rear center console the trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading as shown QA Push down on the button on the rear parcel shelf 2 Fold down the passenger side seatback AWARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold down position Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci dent or sudden stop LRSO863 Thigh extension driver s side only if so equipped Pull up and hold the lever to extend the front portion to the desired position e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause FOLDING REAR SEAT if so daa chi ba equipped Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 W
201. ation 9 13 Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Trailer Tongue Weight zi 6G Do Occupants Luggage 150 Ib x 2 300 Ib 30b x2 60 lb 300 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27 kg 135 kg Luggage ON 150 Ib x 2 300 Ib 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27 kg Occupants Lk Occupants Luggage RERRK CEECEE 150 Ib x 5 750 Ib 30 Ib x 5 150 b 70 kg 340 kg 14 kg 70 kg Example 9 14 Technical and consumer information Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 740 Ib 336 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 1 040 Ib 472 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 500 Ib 227 kg LT10152 Steps for determining correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capac ity is 650 lbs 1400 750 5 X 150 650 Ibs or 640
202. average speed mode can be selected to The time miles km mode can be selected to play the instant fuel economy since the last reset display the average miles per gallon and miles per show the time and distance driven since the last hour since the last reset reset 2 18 Instruments and controls Range mode The range mode can be selected to give you an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The range is constantly calcu lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption OUTSIDE TEMP 68 F Exterior Temperature mode The exterior temperature mode can be selected to provide you with the temperature outside of your vehicle SETTING relied gt MAINTENANCE gt ALERT gt OPTIONS GENTER NEXT Setting mode The setting mode allows you to set reminders or preferences for alerts maintenance intervals or language displays In the setting mode screen press O to move to e Alert Maintenance Options and press to select the menu Instruments and controls 2 19 ALERT SBACK qe TO REST gt ICY WAENTER NEXT Alert mode The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying you of time to rest or icy conditions The time to rest alert lets you know when you have been traveling for a long time and may need a break The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi tions may exist 2 20 Instruments and controls XXXX myNa LO gt S
203. ay illuminate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the recom mended ones are used the Vehicle Dy namic Control system may not operate properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con trol off indicator light may come on The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply de icer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob if so equipped ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem perature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protection For details see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maxi mum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual Starting and driving 5 25 DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before op
204. azardouswaste perchlorate BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Visteon and Clarion Gracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote Inc The Gracenote logo and logo type and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote gracenote XM Radio requires subscription sold separately after first 90 days Not available in Alaska Hawaii or Guam For more information visit www xmradio com xm 2010 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA INC All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Nissan North America Inc NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are Our primary concerns Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs However if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions please contact the NISSAN Con sumer Affairs Department using our toll free number For U S customers 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 For Canadian custo
205. belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts See Child re straints later in this section for more information The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation During normal seat belt use by an occupant the ALR mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten sion AWARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop 1 17 Unfastening the seat belts 1 To unfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically re tracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor should lock and re strict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion see a NISSAN dealer 1 18 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Shoulder belt height adjustment front seats The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad justed to the position best
206. bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also sub ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION if so equipped When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced the satellite radio may not work properly This is not a mal function Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo over the satellite antenna A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance Remove the ice to restore sate
207. blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF LOCK or ACC position This function indicates the NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System is operational If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal functioning the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position If the light still remains on and or the en gine will not start see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser vice as soon as possible Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed C Intermittent intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A Slower or Faster Also the intermit tent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermittent operation speed will be faster NOTE You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func tion for vehicles with navigation system Refer to Comfort settings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recogni tion systems section 2 Low continuous low speed operation 3 High continuous high speed operation Push the lever up to have one sweep opera tion of
208. c selected SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the M4 SEEK CAT button or PP TRACK button is pressed for less than 1 5 sec onds while the iPod is playing the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod will be played When the M4 SEEK CAT button or PP TRACK button is pressed for more than 1 5 sec onds while the iPod is playing the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the iPod will return to the normal play speed iPod PLAYER OPERATION WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped Connecting iPod To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen use the USB jack located in the center console Open the protec tive cover 1 on the USB jack in the center console Then connect the iPod specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection its bat Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 93 tery will be charged while connected to the ve hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position While connected to the vehicle the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle then remove the cable from the iPod iPod is a tr
209. can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing AWARNING To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the en gine is hot Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep coolant out of the reach of chil dren and pets Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations ENGINE OIL bree er At A eed CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 5 Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level It should be between the H High and L Low marks This is the normal oper ating oil level range If the oil level is below Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Re insert it all the way the L Low mark remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6 Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil betwee
210. ccidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 41 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and or dehumidified heating AUTO This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Push the AUTO button on The indicator on the button will illuminate and AUTO will be displayed 2 Operate the driver s side temperature con trol buttons Adjust the temperature display to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically e A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction 3 You can individually set driver s and front passenger s side temperature using each temperature control button When the DUAL button o
211. ced The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When the wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob vious Replace the tires as neces sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in jury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size tread design speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING The use of tires other than those recom mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling VDC system ground clear ance body to tire clearance tire chain clearance speedometer calibration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these effects may lead to acci dents and could result in serious per sonal injury
212. cle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations Al ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period Never leave your Intelligent Key in the vehicle and always lock the vehicle when unattended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection such as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to see If you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features How to arm the vehicle security system 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open 2 Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle 3 Close all doors hood and trunk Lock all doors The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key door handle request switch power door lock switch or mechanical key 4 Confirm that the security indicator light comes on The security light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security sys tem is now pre armed After about 30 sec onds the vehicle security system automati cally shifts into the armed phase The security light begins to flash once every 3 seconds If during the 30 second pre arm time period the driver s door is unlocked by the key or the keyf
213. ction for head re straint or headrest adjustment removal and installation information 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is Interfering with the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions for adjusting the seat belt routing Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three point type seat belt with retractor earlier in this section 7 If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light 2 may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System
214. ction whenever you work on your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with an auto matic engine cooling fan It may come on at any time without warning even if the ignition switch is in the OFF posi tion and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan If you must run the engine in an en closed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack If it is neces sary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery On gasoline engine models the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off A CAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component har nesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in
215. ctions of this device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT TED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio late these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote MusiclD Service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusiclD ser vice to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote MusiclD Service The Gracenote Software
216. d When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While acellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones lf the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and
217. d in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be come excessively worn Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your ve hicle model The driver s and passenger s side floor mats have a grommet hole incorporated in them Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the footwell Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned Appearance and care 7 5 SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this manual AWARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing 7 6 Appearance and care CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by grave
218. d inside the trunk compart ment on the interior of the trunk lid FUEL FILLER DOOR To lock close the fuel filler door securely and lock the doors WPD0454 OPENING THE FUEL FILLER DOOR The fuel filler door automatically unlocks when all doors are unlocked 1 Unlock the fuel filler door using one of the following operations Unlock all doors with the keyfob Unlock all doors with the key Push the power door lock switch to the unlock position 2 To open the fuel filler door push the right side of the fuel filler door to release FUEL FILLER CAP The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove To tighten turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 21 AWARNING Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi tions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis s
219. d rear personal lights will illumi nate regardless of door position The light will go off after 30 minutes unless the igni tion switch is placed in the ON position When the switch is in the center DOOR position 2 the front and rear personal lights will illuminate under the following con ditions Driver s door is unlocked while the igni tion switch is placed in the OFF position 2 50 Instruments and controls Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds Driver s door is opened Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds after driver s door is closed Ignition switch is placed in the OFF posi tion Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds The lights will go off when the ignition switch is in the ON position or the driver s door is closed and locked The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when doors are open When the switch is in the OFF position the front and rear personal lights will not illuminate regardless of door position NOTE The footwell and doorstep lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position These lights will turn off automatically after 30 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery from be coming discharged A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery PERSONAL LIGHTS 00 000 000 000 0
220. d than a person properly wearing a seat belt OFF ROAD RECOVERY While driving the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface If this occurs maintain control of the vehicle by follow ing the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the con ditions of the vehicle road and traffic 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Do not apply the brakes 3 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 4 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 5 If there is nothing in the way steer the ve hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced Do not attempt to drive the ve hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced 6 When it is safe to do so gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface When all tires are on the road surface steer the vehicle to stay in the ap propriate driving lane Starting and driving 5 5 lf you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle road or traffic conditions gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole Rapid air
221. d the brake pedal is depressed For models with a steering wheel lock mechanism In order for the steering wheel to be locked it must be turned about 1 8 of a right or left turn from the straight up position To lock the steering wheel push the ignition switch to the LOCK position To unlock the steering wheel push the ignition switch to the OFF position and open any door with the ignition switch in the ON position and any door open push the ignition switch to the OFF posi tion and close the door If the steering wheel lock release malfunction indicator appears on the vehicle indicator display push the ignition switch again while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left See Vehicle Information Display in the Instruments and Con trols section of this manual 5 8 Starting and driving If the battery of the vehicle is discharged the push button ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK Normal parking position The ignition switch can only be locked in this position The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted in the port
222. d to the one speci fied Display Adjust the image quality of the screen by selecting the preferred adjustment items 4 86 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Audio Choose the preferred language for the au dio Subtitle DVD VIDEO DVD VR Choose the preferred language for the sub titles Display Mode DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD DVD VR Choose from the Full Wide Normal or Cinema mode Title List DVD VR Choose the preferred title from the list Play Mode Choose the preferred play mode PG PL Mode DVD VR Choose from the PG or PL mode USB INTERFACE models without Navigation System if so equipped Connecting a device to the USB input jack The USB input jack is located in the center con sole Open the protective cover on the USB jack then insert the USB device into the jack When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack compatible audio files on the stor age device can be played through the vehicle s audio system Audio file operation AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the AUX button to switch to the USB input mode If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing push the ON OFF VOL control knob to r
223. de tected by the Intelligent Key system Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the vehicle lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key When the driver s side door is open the doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds NOTE The doors may not lock when the Intelli gent Key is in the same hand that is oper ating the request switch to lock the door Put the Intelligent Key in a purse pocket or your other hand A CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the glove box or a storage bin When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the door pockets When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under the spare tire area When the Intelligent Key is placed in side or near metallic materials Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 Unlocking doors 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Push the door handle request switch 4 3 The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once 4 Push the door handle request switch 1 again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors If a door han
224. de lines are shown farther than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 0 m to the place A but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 37 the hill is the place B Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor LHA1201 Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines do not touch the object in the display However the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course 4 38 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Backing up behind a projecting object The position is shown farther than the position in the display However the position is actually at the same distance as the position The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position if the object projects over the actual backing up Course HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN To adjust the Display ON OFF Brightness Tint Color Contrast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor push the SETTING button with the RearView Monitor on and select the Display key Select one of the items and change the value by touching the or key or by turning the NISSAN controller Do not adjust the Brightness Tint Color Con trast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving Make sure the park ing brake is firmly applied and the engine is not running
225. der belt to remove any slack in the belt belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 29 WRS0763 Rear facing step 6 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 7 Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 1 through 6 After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on th
226. dio file operation 4 87 4 88 Video file operation 4 90 V Vany IGOR a a se ke a ar a a ie ee a 3 25 Variable voltage control system 8 16 Vehicle dimensions and weights 9 8 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 36 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 24 Vehicle identification 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN Chassis number 005 eee 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle loading information 9 12 Vehicle recovery aaau aaa 6 13 Vehicle security system 5845 2 24 Vehicle security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 25 3 3 5 10 VENUIAIONS 6a sa ey a oy ee a e 4 40 MGC 6 oa ae bade ee eee ee ae 3 24 Voice recognition system 4 145 Ww Warning Air bag warning light 1 53 2 14 Anti lock brake warning light 2 10 2 11 Battery charge warning light 2 11 Brake warning light 2 11 Engine oil pressure warning light 2 12 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 33 Low fuel warning light 2 13 2 23 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low windshield washer fluid warning WGI rs ote Joe Ge gw ee a ae Ser 2 23 Passenger air bag and status light 1 48 Seat belt warning light 2 13 Vehicle security system 2 24 Warning labels for SRS 1 53 Warning indicator lights
227. dio reception Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the de vice in a different location may reduce or elimi nate the noise FM RADIO RECEPTION Range FM range Is normally limited to 25 30 mi 40 48 km with monaural single channel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM Exter nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same char acteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter the signals will tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to antenna position usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response Multipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in mo mentary flutter or loss of sound AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals because of their low frequency can
228. dle is pulled while unlocking the doors that door may not be unlocked Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door If the door does not unlock after return ing the door handle push the door handle re quest switch to unlock the door 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 60 seconds after pushing the request switch Opening any door Pushing the ignition switch The interior light timer illuminates for a maximum of 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow ing Operations Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the remote controller Switching the room light switch to the OFF position Opening the trunk lid 1 Push the trunk opener request switch for more than 1 second while carrying the Intel ligent Key with you 2 The trunk will unlatch A chime will sound 4 times 3 Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the trunk lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk the outside buzzer will sound and the
229. dows is canceled window switch 6 Right rear passenger s side automatic window switch 2 42 Instruments and controls Driver s side power window switch The driver s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows To open a window push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the de sired window position is reached To close a window pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached Front passenger s power window switch The passenger s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger s window To open the window push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it down until the desired position is reached 1 To close the window pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold D until the desired window position is reached Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows To open the window push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached 1 To close the window pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed only the driver s side window can be opened or closed Push it again to cancel the window lock function Instruments and contr
230. e straint or headrest adjustment removal and installation information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint WRS0680 Forward facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See In stalling top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor LRSO667 Forward facing step 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted LRSO668 Forward facing step 5 5 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 33 WRS0681 Forward facing step 6 6 Re
231. e and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire re place it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS A CAUTION e The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly Master warning light This light comes on when various vehicle infor mation display warnings appear NISSAN Intelligent Key 0 SOUT warning light The Intelligent Key warning light warns of a mal function with the electrical steering lock system if so equipped or the Intelligent Key system After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light comes on for about 2
232. e vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets Fi Air flows from defroster and foot outlets Q7 Air flows from defroster outlets To turn system off Press the OFF button OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally The sunload sensor located on the top driver s side of the instrument panel helps the system maintain a constant temperature Do not put any thing on or around this sensor Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 43 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic Type B Type B 1 Temperature control dial driver s side 8 fan speed control dial OFF but AUTO automatic climate control ON ton button 9 YY front defroster button A C air conditioner ON OFF button 7 amp 2 Air recirculation button gt Fresh air intake button MODE manual air flow control button Temperature control buttons passen ger s side DUAL passenger s side temperature control ON OFF button 7 Gt rear window defroster button ool gt ON 4 44 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems AWARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running
233. e LOCK position and take the Intel ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion a chime sounds when the driver s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on Turn the headlight control switch off before leav ing the vehicle NISSAN Intelligent Key door buzzer The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors When the buzzer sounds be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The vehicle information display is located on the bottom of the speedometer It displays such items as Intelligent Key operation information some indicators and warnings other information For details about the Intelligent Key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section WIC1406 HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Press the button located on the instru ment panel just behind the steering wheel to display the following modes MPG MPG MPH Time Miles Range Exterior Temperature Setting Warning Instruments and controls 2 17 MPG 0 20 40 60 MILES Fuel Economy mode Average speed mode Time Miles km mode The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis The
234. e at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h avoid hard acceleration or deceleration avoid steep uphill grades if possible reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed Instruments and controls 2 15 The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and come on steady Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer A CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and possible damage to the emission con trol system Security indicator light This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF LOCK or ACC position The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational For additional information see Security sys tems later in this section R Slip indicator light This indicator will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits The road surface may be slippery 2 16 instruments and controls Gap en signal hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF indicator light This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle D
235. e audio system on 4 114 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SOURCE select switch Push the source select switch to change the mode in the following sequence Models without Navigation System AM FM1 FM2 XM1 XM2 XM3 satellite radio if so equipped USB if so equipped CD DVD Music Box if so equipped AUX AM Models with Navigation System AM FM1 FM2 XM1 XM2 XM3 satellite radio if so equipped CD DVD Music Box USB iPod Bluetooth Au dio AUX AM These modes are only available when compat ible media storage is inserted into the device This mode is only available when music has been downloaded into the Music Box system Volume control switch Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume v az Menu control switch ENTER button While the display is showing a MAP STATUS or Audio screen tilt the Menu Control switch up ward or downward to select a station track CD or folder For most audio sources tilting the switch up down for more than 1 5 seconds pro vides a different function than a tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds AM and FM Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station Press the ENTER button to show the list of prese
236. e display Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears If the control knob is not pressed for approxi mately 10 seconds the radio or CD display will automatically reappear Settings Navigation Volume amp Beeps Display Bluetooth Adjust navigation settings Speed Sensitive Volume SSV To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5 press the SETTING button Then select the Audio key using the NISSAN controller then press the EN TER button the audio settings screen will be displayed Select the key or key to change the SSV While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by selecting the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the BACK button 4 76 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Audio Adjust bass For information on how to use the NISSAN con troller see How to use the NISSAN controller in this section Settings gt Audio 8 00 Display album cover art When an audio source encoded with album cover art is
237. e seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 1 30 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2 WRS0799 Forward facing web mounted step 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Installing top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor WRS0800 LRSO671 WRS0697 Forward facing rigid mounted step 2 Forward facing step 4 3 The back of the child restraint should be 4 For child restraints that are equipped with Forward facing step 6 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the headrest is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the headrest when the child restraint is removed See Adjustable headrest in this section for headrest adjustment information If the seating position does not have an adjustable headrest and it Is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seat ing position or a
238. e the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tam pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Instruments and controls 2 33 CLIMATE CONTROL SEAT SWITCH if so equipped The climate controlled seat warms up or cools down the front seat by blowing warm or cool air from the surface of the seat The climate control switch is located on the center console The climate controlled seat can be operated as follows 1 Start the engine 2 Turn the control knob to the H Heat side or to the C Cool side as desired The indica tor light on the control knob will illuminate 2 34 Instruments and controls 3 Adjust the desired amount of air using the control knob The climate controlled seat blower remains on low speed for approxi mately 60 seconds after turning the switch on or selecting the desired temperature 4 When the vehicle s interior is warmed or cooled or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the control knob to the Off center position To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat contact a NISSAN dealer A CAUTION The battery could run down if the cli mate control seat is operated while the engine is not running Do not use the climate control seat for extended periods or when no one is using the seat e Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush
239. e to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bag and curtain air bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over The side air bags and curtain air bags op erate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational AWARNING Do not place any objects near the seat back of the front seats Also do not place any objects an umbrella bag etc between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates 1 51 Right after inflation several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag system Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal
240. e your vehicle towed because driv ing it could be dangerous Pressing the brake pedal with the en gine stopped and or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine is running it may indicate the charging system is not func tioning properly Turn the engine off and check the generator belt If the belt is loose broken missing or if the light remains on see a NISSAN dealer immediately A CAUTION e Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will bypass the variable control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Refer to Variable voltage control system in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section later in this manual Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose broken or missing Instruments and controls 2 11 ry Engine oil pressure warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving pull off the road in a safe area stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop The engine oil pressure warning light is not desi
241. eappears Otherwise the radio or CD display will automati cally reappear after about five seconds Clock set The clock displays the time when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position Adjusting the time 1 Push and hold the DISP CLOCK button for more than 2 seconds until the display shows Hour Adjust 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to adjust the hour 3 Press the DISP CLOCK button again the display will show Minute Adjust 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to adjust the minutes 5 Press the DISP CLOCK button again to exit the clock set mode Press the DISP CLOCK button again to return to the regular clock display If no action is taken the display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds If the power supply is disconnected the clock will not indicate the correct time Readjust the time CD display mode To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text press the DISP CLOCK button The DISP CLOCK button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows Track number and Track time Album title Song title Track number displays the track number se lected on the disc Track time displays the amount of time the track has played Album title displays the title of the CD being played Song title displays the title of the selected CD track MP3 display mode To change the text displayed when listening to a CD with MP8s and ID3 tags pr
242. ecsuns sneesseeereededensd ass 5 22 Anti lock Braking System ABS 05 5 23 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 5 24 Cold weather driving 02 ee cece eee eee 5 25 Freeing a frozen door lock 0 cee eens 5 25 PIMP CCZOsuscxseds candieeeraeee soueeecauiees 64 5 25 BAC eiseupevectsocenayedeneetassesneceseses 5 25 Draining of coolant water 00ce eee 5 26 Tire equipment s4occcccnecarciaeeesessdesecata 5 26 Special winter equipment a s sasaaa 5 26 Driving on SNOW Or ICE eseis sacskisacs enid tiska 5 26 Engine block heater if so equipped 5 27 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING AWARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide AWARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases they conta
243. ect and the last source will be played CD IN indicator The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only AUX IN jack The AUX IN jack is located on the CD changer The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan dard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape player MP3 player or a laptop computer Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack 4 68 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems No satellite radio reception is available when the AUX button is pressed to ac cess satellite radio stations unless op tional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio ser vice subscription is active Satellite ra E5 2 3 4 5 6 dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii NERS and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH FMAM DISC AUX COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER if so Tse SEER Tracks equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions in this section Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was 1 amp CD eject button 6 TRACK button turned off 2 VOL ON OFF control knob 7 SEEK CAT button 3 Station select 1 6 buttons 8 DISC button To t
244. ector to R Reverse Both mirrors will turn downward The mirror surfaces will return to their original position when any of the following have occurred The shift selector is moved to any position other than R Reverse The outside mirror control switch is set to the neutral or center position The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Heated mirrors if so equipped The electric control type outside mirrors if so equipped can be heated to defrost defog or de ice for improved visibility Push the rear win dow defogger switch to activate the heating function Push the switch again to deactivate or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER if so equipped The automatic drive positioner system has two features Memory storage function Entry exit function Foldable outside mirrors MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it Two positions for the driver s seat steering col umn and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory Follow these procedures to use the memory system 1 Set the Continuously Variable Transmission CVT shift selector to the P Park position 2 Place the ignition in the ON position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 29 3 Adjust the driver s seat steering column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each
245. ed Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi lar materials If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running HEATED STEERING WHEEL if so equipped LICO421 The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68 F 20 C Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts The indicator light will come on If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68 F 20 C the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68 F 20 C The indicator light will remain on as long as the system Is on Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually The indicator light will go off Instruments and controls 2 35 NOTE If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68 F 20 C when the switch is turned on the system will not heat the steering wheel This is not a malfunction 2 36 Inst
246. ee Space Information about Saved Album Saved Track and Remaining Time is displayed e Delete Songs from the Music Box Delete the current song selected songs or albums by choosing from the list or all songs albums in the Music Box Automatic Recording When this item is turned to ON the Music Box Hard Drive audio system automatically starts recording when a CD is inserted Recording Quality Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132 kbps The default is set to 105 kbps e Gracenote Database Version The version of the built in Gracenote Data base Is displayed Gracenote NOTE The information contained in the Gracenote Database is not fully guaran teed The service of the Gracenote Database on the Internet may be stopped without prior notice for maintenance e gracenote End User License Agreement USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW Gracenote MusicID Terms of Use This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Soft ware enables this application to do online disc identification and obtain music related informa tion including name artist track and title infor mation Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other func tions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User fun
247. eee eee 9 13 LOGGING TDS lt lt cx atctueease dee seedev eet dseteesa 9 15 Measurement of weights 22 5 9 15 Towing a falle i csrescasccrsnsrrosiistireu ninni ses 9 16 Maximum load limits vs0scecckeeeeebasseeecens 9 16 Towing load specification 0 00e 9 19 TOWING SAIC i catexnuewnsceseeeeey enea E Ee 9 19 Plat OWING steseeetSehecesiseusbase i aicseeenes 9 23 Uniform tire quality grading 2 0005 9 24 Emission control system warranty 0 9 25 Reporting safety defects US only 08 9 25 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 9 26 Event Data Recorders EDR 00cc cece eaes 9 27 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9 27 In the event of a collision 4 9 28 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be slightly different When refilling follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Fuel Engine oil 7 Drain and Refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir CVT fluid Power steering fluid PSF Brake fluid Multi purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system oil Windshield washer fluid Capacity Approximate US measure Imp measure Liter 20 gal 16 5 8 gal 75 6
248. eel lock vehicle mechanism Never secure the steer ing wheel by placing the ignition Pulling a stuck vehicle switch to the LOCK position This may damage the steering lock A WARNING mechanism z z enone To avoid vehicle damage serious per Move the shift selector to the N Neu sonal injury or death when recovering a tral position stuck vehicle When towing CVT models with the rear e Contact a professional towing service wheels on the ground if you do not use to recover the vehicle if you have any towing dollies Always release the questions regarding the recovery parking brake procedure In case of emergency 6 13 e Do not use the vehicle tie downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer s instructions Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle Never pull at an angle Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use a tow strap or other device designed specifi cally for vehicle recovery Always follow the manufacturer s instructions for the recovery de vice Do not use the tie down hooks for towing or vehicle recovery 6 14 Incase of emergency Rocking a stuck vehicle A WARNING e Stand clear of a stuck vehicle e Do not spin your tires at high speed This could cause th
249. ell trained specialists who are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership training programs They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve hicles before they work on your vehicle rather than after they have worked on tt You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe the Maintenance precau tions later in this section EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly Also ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links as necessary Make sure that the secondary
250. ellite band SAT1 or SAT2 using the AUX button 2 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner 4 72 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock When the Text key is selected with the NISSAN controller on the display while the radio is playing additional information is displayed on the screen If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided auto
251. ely affect tire life and vehicle handling Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 AWARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certifica tion label The vehicle weight ca pacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Do not load your ve hicle beyond this capacity Over loading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operat ing conditions due to premature tire failure or unfavorable han dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident Loading beyond the specified ca pacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load your vehicle use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself Increase the cold tire inflation pressure as indicated in Check ing tire pressure later in this sec tion when using the tires speci fied by NISSAN above 100 MPH 162 km h where it is legal to do so on a race track for example Failure to increase the cold tire inflation pressure may result in tire failure loss of control and possible injury After such use readjust tire pressure For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information
252. em e Now Playing Lists the tracks stored in the Music Box system Touch the name of the track to begin playing that track Music Library Lists the songs in the Music Library Tracks can be searched by Album Artist or Genre Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 105 Edit Name changes the name of the Music Box gt My Playlists Music Box gt My Playlists playlist Delete Songs deletes songs from the PlayList1 gt Edit Add Current Song playlist PlayList Edit Add Songs by Album PlayList3 Add Songs by Artist PlayList4 Edit Song Order PlayList5 Edit Edit Name Delete Songs 1 6 e My Playlists Displays the playlists stored in the system Touch the Edit key next to a playlist to perform the following operations for that playlist Add Current Song adds the song cur rently playing to the playlist Add Songs by Album adds songs to the playlist by album Add Songs by Artist adds songs to the playlist by artist Edit Song Order edits the order of the songs in the playlist 4 106 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Music Box gt Play Mode Play Mode Alters the play mode of the playlist Touch the key of the mode you wish to apply The modes change the play pattern as follows Normal no play pattern is applied 1 Album Repeat the songs in the current album are repeated 1 Track Repeat the curr
253. em or perform the action The BACK button 4 has two functions e Go back to the previous display cancel Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 5 If you press the BACK button during setup the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen Finish setup In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup Settings gt Time Zone Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic fo on i Manually set the time zone 5 4 3 HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis play screen in menus Whenever a menu selec tion is made or menu item is highlighted different areas on the screen provide you with important information See the following for details 1 Header Shows the path used to get to the current screen for example press the SETTING button gt then select the Clock key then select the Time Zone key 4 6 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 2 Menu Selections Shows the options to choose within that menu screen for example Pacific time zone Mountain time zone etc 3 UP DOWN Movement Indicator Shows that the NISSAN controller may be used to move UP DOWN on the screen and select more options 4 Screen Count Shows the number of menu selections avail able for that screen for example 1 9 5 Footer Information Li
254. em to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys tem 2 Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions 3 Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires 4 Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward Shift back and forth between R Reverse and D Drive Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R Reverse and D Drive Do not spin the tires above 35 mph 55 km h If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior sas caronaadhenwaen a ane ee eewe eeknas 7 2 NV ASMING on ctuwees eeeoeaetsus chia eeen eee een E 7 2 A S co uctee tena EEE E sey 7 2 Removing SOLS esis nanses suo bone aie paa Ei 7 3 WUNOCIDOOY c4c2c2585 lt 408 G02 c0405s44288beeneda ve 7 3 GIASS 25 2 the oe as EEEE TETTETETT EEE TETE TTT 7 3 Aluminum alloy wheels 0 0005 7 3 Crome DANS aalcaceusnoversecoseeeeadeus snes 7 4 Tire OlessiNGs lt ceeceseuactasoesusstanemsees eeed 7 4 Cleaning INGTON sires eeeieeeaneres dxedaaedse duds 7 4 Air fresheners 0 00 cece ee eee ees 7 5 Flo
255. enger compartment Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the ve hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer s specifications Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch not to the vehicle bumper or axle Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights A CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source The module converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical sys tem See a reputable trailer dealer to ob tain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lig
256. ent to the washer for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s in structions for the mixture ratio Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield washer fluid Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze or equivalent A CAUTION e Do not substitute engine anti freeze coolant for windshield washer solution This may result in damage to the paint e Do not fill the windshield washer reser voir tank with washer fluid concen trates at full strength Some methyl al cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield washer reservoir tank e Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield washer reservoir tank Do not use the windshield washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge AWARNING Do not expose the battery to flames an e
257. ent track is re peated 1 Album Random the songs in the cur rent album are played randomly All Random all songs are played ran domly The Transfer Missing Titles to USB and Up Music Box gt Edit Music Information 8 00 date Gracenote from HDD options can be used to update the titles of songs in the Music Library Edit Information of Canent Song Visit www nissanusa com gracenote for detailed instructions on how to update the Gracenote Edit Information by Album database Update Gracenote from USB Device Transfer Missing Titles to USB Update Gracenote from HDD Edit Music Information Edits the information of the songs in the Music Library Edit Information of Current Song Edit Information by Album Update Gracenote from USB Device Transfer Missing Titles to USB Update Gracenote from HDD Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 107 Music Box gt Music Box Settings 8 00 Music Box gt Music Box Used Free Space 8 00 Music Box gt Delete Songs from Music Box 8 00 Saved Track 54 CDDB Version Remaining Time 153 hr 14 min LHA1291 Music Box settings e Delete Songs from Music Box Delete music data stored on the hard drive To set up the Music Box Hard Drive audio system to your preferred settings touch the Menu key e Recording Quality during playback then touch the Music Box Set Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132 tings key kbps
258. equested action If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice after the tone Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 163 Operating tips Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon iS If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice Press the 2 switch on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen If you want to cancel the command press and hold the amp switch The message Voice cancelled will be announced If you want to adjust the volume of the sys tem feedback push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement To minimize the amount of prompts spoken by the system in Alternate Command Mode use the Minimize Voice Feedback function To access the Minimize Voice Feedback function press the SETTING button then select the Others key Then select the Voice Recognition key How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used When saying the phone number 800 662 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh
259. er of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 1 through 4 LRS0674 hinted A ae REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT 4 After attaching the child restraint test it be INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near BELTS the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt if applicable Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve hicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 27 AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden
260. erating the vehicle For details see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave ment However the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions If you operate your ve hicle on snowy or icy roads NISSAN recom mends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type size speed rating and availability informa tion 2 For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 5 26 Starting and driving 3 Tire chains may be used For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter e A scraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades e A sturdy flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support Ashovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts Extra windshield washer fluid to ref
261. erature protection mode If the fluid temperature be comes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer engine power and under some conditions vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited Fail safe If the vehicle is driven under extreme con ditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated The MIL may come on to indicate the fail safe mode is activated see Malfunction indicator light MIL in the Instrument and controls sec tion This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds Then push the switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal op erating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary AWARNING When the high fluid temperature protec tion mode or fail safe operation occurs vehicle speed may be gradually reduced The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially care ful when driving If necessary pull to the side of the road at a safe
262. erformed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling Sounds are not recorded These data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equip ment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manu facturer and NISSAN dealer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have ac cess to the vehicle or the EDR EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per mitted by
263. ese coewst wctex 4 118 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System without Navigation System if so equipped 4 118 Regulatory Information 00ce eens 4 120 Using ING system cite ww eee cnd Semee peeks 4 120 Gonto DUNGHS 4n0200024e2nGetyaneuwRereus 4 122 Getting started ccateascadrantectondame en 4 123 List of voice Commands 0e eee eees 4 125 Speaker adaptation SA mode 0005 4 129 Manual Control if so equipped 655 4 131 Troubleshooting guide 2 02c221eceeesewseeven ss 4 132 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System if so equipped 4 133 Regulatory Information 00e eee e eee 4 135 VOICE COMMANGS erres comedod hes memdencee meters 4 135 Connecting procedure 0 ccc eee eee 4 135 Vehicle Phonebook 0 cece eee eee 4 137 Handset Phonebook 02200000ee 4 139 WiaRINO Calls ce see atte ada pete suet ne er soe 4s 4 140 Receiving a Call surcecaeepueeacectcceenne sees 4 140 During a Gall satece see cece eanveceaee ec eE 4 141 Ending 2 Callcce aotveuscunteua shes aseree essen 4 142 Phone SUING Spe eetonewecereceereweeaceeaees 4 142 Bluetooth settings J seecceeadewavdnewee soceye de 4 143 Kall WONG s cad ogc eaeete paces ddi iera 4 144 NISSAN Voice Recognition System if so equipped jo cwwenesectve contnwenntiing eoues 4 145 NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode 4 145 Using the syste
264. ess the DISP CLOCK button The DISP CLOCK button will scroll through the CD text as follows Disc number Track number and Folder number gt Folder title Song title Artist name gt Album title e Disc number displays the number of the current disc playing Track number displays the number of the track playing on the selected disc Folder number displays the number of the current folder on the MP3 CD Folder title displays the title of the folder Song title displays the title of the song play ing Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 65 Artist name displays the name of the artist of the song playing Album title displays the title of the album of the song playing FM AM radio operation FM AM band select Pressing the AM FM button will change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM When the AM FM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON If a compact disc is playing when the AM FM button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural recep
265. essure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions be low Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic
266. estart the USB memory dq Pl SEEK CAT and TRACK Reverse or Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT M4 rewind button or TRACK gt I fast forward button for 1 5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The track plays at an in creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding When the button is released the audio file re turns to normal play speed 44 gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the SEEK CAT button M4 while an au dio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the SEEK CAT button M4 several times to skip backward several tracks Press the TRACK button P while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track Press the TRACK button Pl several times to skip forward several tracks If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped the first track of the next folder is played Folder selection To change to another folder in the USB memory turn the TUNE FOLDER knob or choose a folder displayed on the screen using the NISSAN con troller RPT RDM button When the RPT RDM button is pressed while the USB memory is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows Repeat All 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Random 1 Folder Random Repeat All Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 87 This U
267. ey is touched or selected with the NISSAN controller Top Menu When the Top Menu key is selected while the DVD is playing the top menu specific to each disc will be displayed For details see the instruc tions attached to the disc DVD settings Select the Settings key to adjust the following settings Key DVD VIDEO DVD AUDIO Displays the operation keys for the specific DVD menu Select the directional keys to move the cursor on the DVD menu Select the Enter key to fix the selected menu item Select the Move key to move the loca tion of the operation keys on the screen Select the Back key to return to the previous menu screen Select the Hide key to hide the opera tion keys Title Menu DVD VIDEO Some menus specific to each disc will be shown For details see the instructions at tached to the disc Title Search DVD VIDEO DVD VR The scene with the specified title will be displayed the number of times the or side is selected Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 85 Group Search DVD AUDIO VIDEO CD The scene with the specified group will be displayed the number of times the or side is selected 10 Key Search DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CD DA DVD VR Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and select the OK
268. fic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press and release the f button located on the steering wheel After the tone sounds speak a command The command given is picked up by the micro phone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted lf you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them fa command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Please try again Repeat the command ina clear voice If you want to go back to the previous com mand you can say Go back or Correc tion any time the system is waiting for a response You can cancel a command when the sys tem is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also press and hold the button on the steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end the VR session Whenever the VR ses sion is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to adjust the vol
269. folder number if playing compressed audio files Press the ENTER button to show the Music Box Menu Bluetooth Audio if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number AUX Press the ENTER button to show the AUX Menu Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 115 oP ON gt VOL volume control switch TUNE TRACK switch ON OFF button SRC source select button Display REAR AUDIO CONTROLS if so equipped The audio system can also be operated using the rear controls For information on canceling the rear seat con troller see Rear control cancel switch if so equipped in the Instruments and controls sec tion ON OFF button With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position press the ON OFF button to turn the audio system on or off VOL volume control switch Pushthe side of the switch to increase the volume or push the side of the switch to decrease the volume SRC source button Press the SRC button to change the audio mode as follows Models without Navigation System AM FM1 FM2 XM1 XM2 XM3 USB CD DVD Music Box if so equipped AUX AM 4 116 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Models with Navigation System AM FM1 FM2 XM1 XM2 XM3 CD DVD Music Box USB iPod Bluetooth
270. from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finish ers See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 39 Sit upright and well back AWARNING The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity fron tal collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section WRS0031 The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys tem if you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of posi tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it w
271. from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child s arm A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap shoulder belt 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat The seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a low back booster seat 1 is chosen the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seatback is lower than the center of the child s ears a high back booster seat 2 should be used lf the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child Always follow all recommended pro cedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories re
272. g and driving 5 2 Push Starting e sa aa e iva aE me a ot oe 6 10 Starting the engine 5 11 Steering Heated steering wheel 2 35 Power steering fllid 8 12 Power steering system 5 22 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 114 Slop ligi e a aa sgia aa a a a A 8 27 Storage oh ee Se ee we a 2 37 DUN VISOS 6 0 t s be oe Ee ee eS 3 24 Sunglasses case 00 00 eee 2 38 Sunroof see Moonroof 9 45 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 53 2 14 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 46 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels 1 53 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSTEM s s 6 4 4 wo We he ae ee 2 ee 1 39 Supplemental restraint system Supplemental airbag system 1 39 Switch Autolight switch 4 2 30 Automatic power window switch 2 44 Fog igm swith es ob 6 4 0 44 2 4 2 32 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 33 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 28 Headlight control switch 2 29 Power door lock switch 3 5 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWOI a sca a hk A Bs ae ow ok He Sr oo 2 27 Turn signal switch cs eae ee ee a ws 2 32 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off SWG ees 64m oo amp ee Ge Sule a 2 36 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 26 T Tachometer 0 a eae 2 5 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5
273. g memory storage Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the SET switch If the main memory has not been stored the indicator light will come on for approximately 0 5 seconds When the memory has stored the position the indicator light will stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds Ifthe battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the memory storage function will be canceled and must be restarted before a stored memory position can be set again Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the memory storage function You can also restart the memory storage function using the following procedure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position Once the memory storage function has been restarted you can store a memory position See Memory storage function in this sec tion Selecting the memorized position Set the shift selector to the P Park position then Within 45 seconds of opening the driver s door push the memory switch 1 or 2 or Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the memory switch 1 or 2 The driver s seat steering column and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light blinking and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds ENTRY EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the driver s
274. g the proper product Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash ing Follow the instructions supplied with the wax Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing ona base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un derbody and suspension Before the winter pe riod and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary retreated Ot x WAI0007 GLASS When cleaning the rear window it may be easier to clean if the high mounted stop light if so equipped is removed first Be careful when removing the high mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high mounted stop light wires To remove the high mounted stop light Q Push toward rear of vehicle 2 Lift to remove The high mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle Use glass cleaner to re
275. gency section of this manual The radiator is equipped with a pres sure type radiator cap To prevent en gine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap To remove the engine compartment covers un hook the clips located as illustrated To remove the engine cover pull the cover up ward first and then toward the front of the vehicle 2 Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 A CAUTION When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50 anti freeze and 50 demineralized or distilled water The use of other types of coolant solu tions may damage the engine cooling system Demineral ized or dis tilled water Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant or equivalent Outside temperature down to 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant to the MAX level A If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level If the cooling system frequently requires coolant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer
276. gent key into the Intelli gent Key port to start the engine Replace the discharged battery with a new one as soon as possible For additional information see Push Button Ignition Switch in the Starting and Driving section Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as sig nals from a TV and personal computer the bat tery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a bat tery see Battery replacement in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section For models with a steering wheel lock mecha nism Because the steering wheel is locked elec trically unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the Lock position is impossible Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 when the vehicle battery is completely dis charged Unlocking the steering wheel is impos sible even if the Intelligent key is inserted into the Intelligent Key port Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis tered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelli gent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer A CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the Intelligent Key Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into cont
277. ging a flat tire When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors A CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu minate Some examples are Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle lf a computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complie
278. glows con tinuously while the ignition is placed in the ON position with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may indi cate a malfunction in the system Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer No changes should be made to the seat belt system For example do not modify the seat belt add material or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per sonal injury Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti vated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See your NISSAN dealer Removal and installation of preten sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer All seat belt assemblies including re tractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN recom mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hard ware should be inspected after any col lision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations The child restraints should
279. gned to indicate a low oil level Use the dipstick to check the oil level See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual A CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se rious damage to the engine almost imme diately Such damage is not covered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so KOJ Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare 2 12 Instruments and controls The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the warning light will illuminate When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the drivers door opening The low tire pressure warning light does not automati cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad justed After the tire is inflated to the rec ommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off
280. h 4 If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock unlock the doors DOOR LOCKS UNLOCKS PRECAUTION Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli gent Key is outside the vehicle After locking with the door handle request switch verify the doors are securely locked by testing them Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 9 To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch The door will be unlocked but will not open Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Locking doors OPERATION 1 Move the shift selector to the P position You can lock or unlock the doors without taking Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag tion Make sure the Intelligent Key is not left When you carry the Intelligent Key with you you in the vehicle ca
281. h a dry cloth Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected Do not use wax on the camera window Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth damp ened with mild detergent diluted with water Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 39 VENTS LHA1132 LHA1133 Center Side Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides Open or close the vents by using the dial Move the dial toward the to open the vents or toward the BI to close them 4 40 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Hono Oooo pagpa f H nju nn mju fufa juju Rear LHA1134 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic Type A s oO Type A Temperature control buttons driver s 9 side AUTO climate control ON button 10 7 front defroster button 11 7 amp 2 Air recirculation button MODE manual air flow control button Temperature control buttons passen ger s side DUAL passenger side temperature control ON OFF button eS Fresh air intake button LHA1139 fan speed control dial OFF but ton Ut rear window defroster button A C air conditioner ON OFF button AWARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could a
282. h is in the ON position The automatic moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the moonroof is canceled Sliding the moonroof To slide the moonroof To fully open the moonroof push the switch C toward the open position until it reaches the second detent If the switch is pushed to the first detent only the sunshade will open To fully close the moonroof push the switch 2 toward the close position until it reaches the second detent If the switch 2 is pushed to the first detent the moonroof will close but the sunshade will remain open To open or close the moonroof part way release the switch 4 or 2 while the moon roof is sliding open or closed The moonroof will stop at the desired position Tilting the moonroof To tilt the moonroof To tilt the moonroof up push and release the tilt switch 3 When the moonroof is open it will automatically close and then tilt up To tilt the moonroof down push and release the tilt switch or push the switch toward the close position until it reaches the first detent To tilt the moonroof down and close the sunshade at the same time push the switch 2 to the close position until it reaches the second detent Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the moonro
283. hat has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information Instruments and controls 2 55 FCC Notice This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Opera tion is subject to the following two condi tions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation This transmitter has been tested and com plies with FCC and DOC MDC rules Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment DOC ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I D CV2V67690 2 56 Instruments and controls 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments Keys E E E E E E aveeeeusee eves 3 2 NISSAN Intelligent Key 2 000 00 3 2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys 3 3 DOOlSa3eyeon EE E Caen A E E E uae 3 4 Locking with key eussssusananannnrnrrrnnnnnnno 3 4 Locking with inside lock knob 005 3 5 Locking with power door lock switch 3 5 Automatic door locks ocustcovesereveseusernerees 3 6 Child safety rear door lock 0
284. he before parking your vehicle steering wheel so that the predicted course lines enter the parking space 2 The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen A when the shift selector is moved to the R Reverse position 4 36 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines parallel to the parking space while referring to the pre dicted course lines 5 When the vehicle is parked in the space completely move the shift selector to the P Park position and apply the parking brake DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects LHA1199 Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill the dis tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance For example the display shows 8 ft 1 0 m to the place A but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on the hill is the place B Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill the distance guide lines and the vehicle width gui
285. he occupant or child restraint in a rear seat The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status For example if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light AF located in the meter and gauges area on the driver s side of the instrument panel will blink Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 1 49 Other supplemental front impact air bag precautions AWARNING Do not place any objects on the steer ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such ob jects may become dangerous projec tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate Immediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may se verely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus
286. he NISSAN Ad vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regu lations It is also permitted in Canada However all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The driver supplemental front impact air bag Is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front impact air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper front air bag sys tem operation The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage inflators It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor the Air Bag Control Unit ACU seat belt buckle sensors and the occu pant classification sensor pattern sensor Infla tor operation is based on the severity of a colli sion and seat belt usage for the driver For the front passenger the occupant classification sen sor is also monitored Based on information from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate ina crash depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or un belted Additionally
287. he button is pressed When the TRACK PP button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played 44 gt SEEK CAT and TRACK Rewind Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT M4 rewind button or the TRACK PPI fast forward button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed TUNE FOLDER knob While playing an MP3 WMA CD turn the TUNE FOLDER knob right or left to scan forward or backward through available folders CD select buttons To play another CD that has been loaded press a CD select button 1 6 RPT RDM button When the RPT RDM button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows CD All Disc Repeat 1 Disc Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Disc Random 1 Disc Random All Disc Repeat MP3 WMA CD All Disc Repeat 1 Disc Repeat 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Disc Random 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random All Disc Repeat All Disc Repeat All discs loaded will be re peated 1 Disc Repeat The disc that is currently p
288. he number of albums reaches the maximum of 99 The number of tracks reaches the maximum of 2 000 Automatic recording If the Automatic Recording function is turned to ON recording starts when a CD is inserted and any previous CD converting is finished For more information see Music Box settings in this section Stopping recording To stop the recording select the Stop REC key on the screen If the CD is ejected the audio system is turned off or the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position the recording also stops 4 98 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems jMusicBox si Box abun se XXXXXXX E XXXXXXX 2 XXXXXX B ee 0 28 1 Playlist Repeat Text Menu Playing recorded songs Select the Music Box audio system by using one of the following methods Press the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel For information see Steering wheel switch for audio control in this section Press the DISC button repeatedly until the center display changes to the Music Box mode Stopping playback The system stops playing when Another mode radio CD USB memory iPod or AUX is selected The audio system is turned off The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the M4 SEEK CAT button while a track is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the PPI TRA
289. he tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load be comes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load Technical and consumer information 9 17 Gross axle weight T11012M Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight GVW Maximum Gross Axle Weight GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 18 Technical and consumer information Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salv
290. he wiper replace the blades A CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam age the windshield and impair driver vision REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn Q Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield 2 Push the release tab then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove 3 Remove the wiper blade 4 Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place A CAUTION After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass otherwise the arms may be dam aged from wind pressure Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 WDI0337 Be careful not to let anything get into the washer nozzle A This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation If something gets into the nozzle remove it with a needle or small pin 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer Self adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self adjusting brakes The front and rear disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied AWARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When
291. hen it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi cal from the steering wheel or instru ment panel Always use the seat belts 1 40 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us age then inflates the air bags Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor pattern sensor that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions This sensor is only used in this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci dent See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section Keep hands on the outside of the steer ing wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates Sit upright and well back AWARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 41
292. hen returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys To fold down the driver side of the rear seat reach Secondary trunk lid release if sO through the opening and pull on the strap 4 equi located behind the seat qu pped For models with a rear center console the trunk can be accessed through the access panel be tween the rear seats as shown The rear seats can be locked using the mechani cal key to prevent unauthorized access Fold down the center arm rest Insert the mechanical key into the trunk com partment access lid lock Fold down the trunk compartment access lid For more in formation on the mechanical key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments chapter Pull the rear seat trunk release handle 4 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Center armrest Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal HEAD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safet
293. her liquids to come in contact with electronic compo nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface de icing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corro sion which may be required in some areas con sult a NISSAN dealer Appearance and care 7 7 MEMO 7 8 Appearance and care 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirements 2 e0 ee 8 2 General maintenance 2 0c ee ee eee eee 8 2 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 2 Maintenance precautionS s s s seess aaran nerra 8 5 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine cooling system 00e eee eee eee eee 8 7 Checking engine coolant level 0005 8 8 Changing engine coolant 2 002 00 8 8 ENGNG Cllscccceeceee cesceuseauen TEET ETE 8 9 Checking engine oil level 00 005 8 9 Changing engine oil 0e cece eee eee 8 10 Changing engine oil filter 00 0 8 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid 8 11 Power steering MWid seweensudoe denueeoenneeeeskuad 8 12 Broke UIC eres ou reinet micas encetehenee E 8 12 Brake MUs cerra kE a E E EEA 8 13 Windshield w
294. hicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Engine oil with API Certification Mark Viscosity SAE 5W 30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendation in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual COLD TIRE PRESSURE See Tire and Loading Information label The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver s door For additional information see Wheels and tires in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCEDURE During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations outlined in the Break in schedule information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fol low these recommendations for the future reli ability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life Printing March 2010 04 Publication No OMOE OA35U1 Printed in U S A
295. highest position 2 Push and hold the lock knob 3 Remove the head restraint from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle Reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seating position Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction The stalk with the adjustment notches 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 Front seat Active Head Restraints The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear end collision The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu pant s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear end collisions After the collision the head restraints return to their original position Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described in this section ADJUSTABLE HEADREST
296. his option on indicator light illuminated a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed X12 OFF BUTTON To change the display brightness press the lt gt OFF button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display The brightness can then be adjusted using the NISSAN controller If no operation is performed within 5 seconds the display will return to the previous display 8 00 SO cccccescasel Q Incoming Call te Outgoing Call ERTS Switch Beeps 9 ON Gudance Voice 9 ON 3 7 Use volume knob to adjust during playback Settings gt Volume amp Beeps Ringtone Press and hold the 2 OFF button for more than two seconds to turn the display off Press the button again to turn the display on IMAGE VIEWER if so equipped USING THE IMAGE VIEWER When a compatible portable storage device is plugged into the USB jack located in the center console compatible image files stored on the device can be viewed on the control panel de vice Connecting the portable storage device To connect a portable storage device to the sys tem so that images stored on it can be viewed insert the device into the USB jack located in the center console Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 31 Settings gt Image Viewer 1 XXXXXXX jpg 2 XXXXXXX jpg 3 XXXXKXX jpg 4 XXXXXXX jpg E Full Sereen Display Viewing image
297. hock and can cause serious injury Use a heavy duty 3 wire 3 pronged ex tension cord rated for at least 10 A Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 VAC outlet Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury Engine block heaters are available through NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature starting The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20 F 7 C or lower To use the engine block heater 1 SA Turn the engine off Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3 wire 3 pronged extension cord Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 volt AC VAC outlet The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 4 hours depending on outside temperatures to properly warm the engine coolant Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on Before starting the engine unplug and prop erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts Starting and driving 5 27 MEMO 5 28 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency Emergency engine shut off 0005 6 2 SOA a ctunte cone eset eoeeaheswecs seeps ease eee eee 6 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 6 2 Changing a flat tire vs
298. hts contact a NISSAN dealer or repu table trailer dealer Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system make sure it conforms to federal and or local regulations and that it is properly installed AWARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di rectly to the vehicle brake system When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used However most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regu lations where you plan to tow Several types of braking systems are available Some examples are listed below Surge Brakes The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers In this type of system there is no hydraulic or electric connec tion for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer Electric Trailer Brakes Electric braking systems are activated by an electronic sig nal sent from a trailer brake controller special brake sensing module Have a professional supplier of towing equipment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing
299. ication The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 1 P215 65R15 95H 65 t 3 Example 1 Tire size example P215 65R15 95H P The P indicates the tire is de signed for passenger vehicles not all tires have this information Three digit number 215 This num ber gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to side wall edge Two digit number 65 This number known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself 4 D t 5 WDI0395 R The R stands for radial Two digit number 15 This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches Two or three digit number 95 This number is the tire s load index It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support You may not find this information on all tires be cause it is not required by law 7 H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating DOT XX XX XXX XXXX DOT t 1 XX XX t t 2 3 XXX t Example 4 2 TIN Tire Identification Number for a new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 DOT Abbreviation for the Depart ment Of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number 2 Two digit code identification mark Manufacturer s 3 Two digit code Ti
300. icle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch Push and release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed in creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed Push and release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed de creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle re turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h Starting and driving 5 19 BREAK IN SCHEDULE A CAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short ened engine life and reduced engine performance Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow and do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as much as p
301. idents do occur In this unlikely event there is some important information you should know Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non genuine collision parts in order to cut costs among other reasons 9 28 Technical and consumer information Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN s original exacting specifica tions if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value the solution is simple Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts NISSAN does not warrant non NISSAN parts nor does NISSAN s warranty apply to damage caused by a non genuine part Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety preserve your warranty pro tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle And if your vehicle was leased using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident Non genuine imitation parts may not provide such built in safeguards Also non genuine parts of ten show premature wear rust and corrosion Why should you take a chance In over 40 states the law says you must be advised if non genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle And some sta
302. ies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys tem Air bag system for the front passen ger See Supplemental restraint system later in this section INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint NISSAN recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu facturer s instructions for installation and use SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg can be placed in a forward facing child restraint Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations NISSAN recom mends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use LARGER CHILDREN Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided The seat belt may
303. ight illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock func tion is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec tion Brake or O Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on when the parking brake is applied Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied stop the ve hicle and perform the following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer AWARNING Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driv ing could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise hav
304. ill grade do not hold the vehicle by depress ing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con trolled to produce maximum power and smooth operation The CVT can operate in two different automatic drive modes D Drive mode Move the shift selector to D Drive the transmission is in the normal forward automatic driving mode The posi tion indicator in the meter shows a D The D Drive mode does not produce a gear change sensation like a traditional automatic transmission Ds Drive Sport mode Move the shift se lector over from D Drive to the left into the manual shift gate The position indicator in the meter shows a Ds In Ds Drive Sport mode transmission operation changes to Sporty driving shift operation creating a more aggressive acceleration feeling than the D Drive mode and a gear change sen sation when the driver accelerates quickly When the driver selects M Manual mode ratio with shift selector or shift paddles if so equipped during Ds Drive Sport mode operation the driver must move the shift selector from Ds mode to D mode and back again to re select Ds Drive Sport mode To cancel the Ds mode return the shift se lector to the D Drive position The trans mission returns to the automatic drive mode The CVT can operate in two manual drive modes M Manual mode With the shift selector in
305. ill the reservoir tank DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE AWARNING e Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded Whatever the condition drive with cau tion Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or downshifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement Allow greater following distances on slippery roads Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reach ing it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control on slip pery roads Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle ENGINE BLOCK HEATER if so equipped AWARNING e Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2 pronged adapter You can be se riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection Disconnect and properly store the en gine block heater cord before starting the engine Damage to the cord could result in an electrical s
306. in terface Use the NISSAN controller and the BACK button to play the iPod with your favorite settings The touchscreen can also be used to control your favorite settings The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual Now Playing e Playlists Artists Albums Songs Podcasts Genres Composers Audiobooks Shuffle Songs The following keys shown on the screen are also available MENU returns to the previous screen e Pil plays pauses the music selected Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 95 iPod gt Play Mode Play mode While the iPod is playing touch the Menu key to display the iPod menu Touch the Play Mode key to display the Play Mode screen and adjust the settings for Shuffle Repeat and Audio books For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the 44 SEEK CAT button or gt gt TRACK button is pressed for less than 1 5 sec onds while the iPod is playing the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod will be played When the 4 SEEK CAT button or PPI TRACK button is pressed for more than 1 5 sec onds while the iPod is playing the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the iPod will return to the normal play speed The NIS
307. in colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is danger ous It can cause unconsciousness or death 5 2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all win dows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the trunk lid closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compart ment If you must drive with the trunk lid open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the air recirculation but ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air If electrical wiring or other cable con nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body follow the manufacturer s recommen dation to prevent carbon monoxide en try into the vehicle The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever a The vehicle is raised for service b You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment c You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system d You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system un derbody or rear of the vehicle THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust s
308. ing HomeLink for Canadian CUSIOMENS sarreren er beeen dee eee en ees oes 2 54 Operating the HomeLink universal HONSCCWels ton bane et dauehectenewbeesaauesenaus 2 55 Programming trouble diagnosis 4 2 55 Clearing the programmed information 2 55 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 55 If your vehicle is stolen 0 cece eee eens 2 55 INSTRUMENT PANEL 8 Shift paddles if so equipped P 5 15 9 Windshield wiper washer switch P 2 26 ian ns aS 10 Display screen Navigation system Tmo if so equipped P 4 16 11 Display screen Navigation system controls if so equipped P 4 16 12 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 53 2 13 Glove box P 2 39 14 Display screen models without Navigation system P 4 4 15 Climate controls models without Navigation system P 4 41 16 Audio system controls models without Navigation system P 4 48 cooocs 17 Passenger air bag status light P 1 50 CO Sores o 18 Audio system controls P 4 48 19 Climate controls models with Navigation system P 4 44 20 Shift selector P 5 11 21 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 33 22 Ignition switch behind the steering wheel P 5 7 1 Side and center vents P 4 40 4 Meters and gauges P 2 3 2 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn Driver supplemental air bag horn o signal switch P 2 28 P 1
309. ing gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle for which NISSAN is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage If any of the above symptoms are en countered have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer However now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is nota cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load A CAUTION Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region API certification mark ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil
310. ing on the sealing surface of the engine Failure to do so could lead to engine damage 6 Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil 7 Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional 2 3 turn 8 Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required 9 Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level Add engine oil if necessary CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT FLUID A CAUTION e Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 Do not mix with other fluids Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 POWER STEERING FLUID The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122 176 F 50 80 C or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera tures of 32 86 F 0 30 C If the fluid is at or below the MIN line add Genu ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX depending on system fluid temperature Remove the cap and fill through the opening 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself A CAUTION e DO NOT OVERFILL e Recommended fluid is NISSAN
311. injury For example do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat backs or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bag Work around and on the side air bag and curtain air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wir ing harnesses should not be modified or disconnected Unauthorized electri cal test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Seat belts with pretensioners front seats AWARNING The pretensioners cannot be reused af ter activation They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit 1 52 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but a pretensioner is not activated be sure to have the pre tensioner system checked and if nec essary replaced by your NISSAN dealer e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system This is to pre vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretens
312. ints only at the locations shown in the illustration Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors The child restraint will not be secured properly Inspect the lower anchors by insert ing your fingers into the lower anchor area Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an chors are obstructed WRS0700 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0661 LATCH webbing mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this sys tem you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child re straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the in structions provided by the child restraint manu facturer LRS0662 LATCH rigid mounted attachment When installing a child restraint carefully read and fo
313. io phone and voice recognition systems 4 165 Settings gt Speaker Adaptation 8 00 Push the ENTER switch fo select Settings gt Speaker Adaptation 8 00 Music Box Changes the source of the audio system to the Music Box Alternate Command Mode ON To exit nold the TALK switch Settings gt Speaker Adaptation 8 00 Continuous Learning User Name can be edited 5 Select a category to be learned by the sys tem from the following list Phone Navigation Information Audio Help The voice commands in the category are displayed 6 Select a voice command to train The Voice Recognition system starts 7 The system requests that you repeat a com mand after a tone This command is also displayed on the screen 8 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from C tB Speak the command that the system requested 9 When the system has recognized the voice command the voice of the user is learned Press the switch or the BACK button to return to the previous screen If the system has learned the command correctly the voice command indicator on the screen turns on 4 166 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Speaker Adaptation function settings Edit Name Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen Reset Result Resets the user s voice that the Voice Recogni tion system has learned Continuous Learning When this i
314. io system cannot perform recording under the following conditions There is not enough space in the hard drive The number of aloums reaches the maximum of 500 The number of tracks reaches the maximum of 3 000 Automatic recording If the Automatic Recording function is turned to ON recording starts when a CD is inserted For more information see Music Box settings in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 103 Stopping recording To stop the recording touch the Stop REC key on the screen If the CD is ejected the audio system is turned off or the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position the recording also stops TUNE 3 Track All Songs Artist NO ARTIST Album 2009 03 10 09 24 Track 2009 03 10 09 24 03 Track 27 of 54 Playing recorded songs Select the Music Box audio system by using one of the following methods Press the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel For information see Steering wheel switch for audio control in this section Press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the Music Box mode 4 104 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Give voice commands For information see NISSAN Voice Recog nition system in this section Stopping playback The system stops playing when Another mode radio CD USB Bluetooth Audio or AUX is
315. ion Selecting the item Touch an item to select To select the Naviga tion key touch the Navigation key 4 on the screen Touch the BACK key to return to the previous screen Settings gt Volume amp Beeps 8 00 Use volume knob to adjusi during playback Adjusting the item Touch the key or the key to adjust the settings of an item Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time or touch the double up arrow to scroll up an entire page Touch the down arrow 8 to scroll down the page one item at a time or touch the double down arrow to scroll down an entire page Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key 4 There are some options available when inputting characters e Uppercase Shows uppercase characters Lowercase Shows lowercase characters Space Inserts a space e Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch Touch and hold the Delete key to delete all of the characters e OK Completes the character input Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen use a dry soft cloth If additional cleaning is necessary use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth Never spray the screen with water or de tergent Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 19 1 Light Sensitivity Ligh
316. ion control system An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill ing it Use only approved portable fuel con tainers for flammable liquid A CAUTION If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage Insert the fuel filler cap straight into the fuel filler tube then tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate If the ENGINE light SOON illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The ENGINE light should turn off after a few driving trips If the ENGINE light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a
317. ion system P 4 4 15 Climate controls models without Navigation system P 4 41 16 Audio system controls models without Navigation system P 4 48 cooocs 17 Passenger air bag status light P 1 50 CO Sores o 18 Audio system controls P 4 48 19 Climate controls models with Navigation system P 4 44 20 Shift selector P 5 11 21 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 33 22 Ignition switch behind the steering wheel P 5 7 1 Side and center vents P 4 40 4 Meters and gauges P 2 3 2 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn Driver supplemental air bag horn o signal switch P 2 28 P 1 39 P 2 33 A ie oo 3 Steering wheel switch for audio control 6 Security indicator light P 2 24 ilttelescopic steering wheel controls and Bluetooth Hands Free Phone 7 Cruise control main set switches if so equipped P 3 23 System P 4 114 4 1 18 P 5 1 8 0 6 Illustrated table of contents 24 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch P 2 36 Outside mirror controls P 3 27 Heated steering wheel switch if so equipped P 2 35 Trunk lid release switch P 3 20 Rear control cancel switch if so equipped P 2 49 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual if so equipped See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS 0 8 Illustrated table
318. ion systems 4 139 Call History Select the name from the in Shane Bo Yu 8 00 coming or outgoing call history Phone Bo mY 8 00 Dial Number Input the phone number manu Vehicle Phonebook Volume amp Ringtone ally using a keypad displayed on the screen Incoming Call For information on how to use the touch lt a Answer Call History Connect Phone screen see How to use the touchscreen in G 0 00 TERP this section Handset Phonebook Connected Phones F XXXXXXXX Reject Call Dieinumber ff 3 For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except XXXXXXXX Dial Number ion w genn Dial Number dialing commences when the listed name is selected Dialing commences when OK is selected ifthe number is input ted manually The screen changes to the Call in Progress screen 4 After the call is over perform one of the MAKING A CALL following to finish the call RECEIVING A CALL To make a call follow the procedure below a Select the Hang up key on the Call in When you hear a phone ring the display will Progress screen change to phone mode To receive a call follow 1 Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel or the switch on the steering b Press the switch on the steering wheel The Phone screen will appear on wheel a Select the Answer key on the display the display c When the Call in Progress screen iS b Press the PHONE button on the instrument displayed press
319. ional equipment This information is lo cated on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This informa tion is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GCWR Gross Combined Weight rating The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the ve hicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer tongue weight must be in cluded as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load ing Information label To get the combined weight of occu pants and cargo add the weight of all occupants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in the follow ing illustration Technical and consumer inform
320. ioners Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury e Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury The pretensioner system activates in conjunction with the front air bag system Working with the seat belt retractor it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants The pretensioner is encased within the seat belt retractor These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts When a pretensioner activates smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After pretensioner activation load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys tem the supplemental air bag warning light AF will not come on will flash intermi
321. iscs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO or DVD Video logo on the disc or packaging Do not expose the CD DVD to direct sunlight CDs DVDs that are of poor quality dirty scratched covered with finger prints or that have pinholes may not work properly The following CDs DVDs are not guar anteed to play Copy control compact discs CCCD e Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Recordable compact discs DVDER DVD R DL Rewritable compact discs DVD RW DVD RW DL Do not use the following CDs DVDs as they may cause the CD DVD player to malfunction 3 1 in 8 cm discs e CDs DVDs that are not round e CDs DVDs with a paper label e CDs DVDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs DVDs It has no capa bilities to record or burn CDs DVDs If the CD DVD cannot be played one of the following messages will be dis played Disc Read Error e Confirm that the CD DVD is inserted correctly the label side is facing up etc Confirm that the CD DVD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches Please Eject Disc This error may be due to the tempera ture inside the player getting too high Remove the CD DVD by pushing the EJECT button and after a short time reinsert the CD DVD The CD DVD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal If the error
322. isplay will change to NOTE If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small the dis play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may con tinue to be displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display Average fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1 3 mi 500 m After a reset or connecting the battery kkk cables the display might show Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0 Press the INFO button and select the Fuel Economy key then select the Reset key using the NISSAN controller Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 7 12 00 Information gt Fuel Economy Record 20 p eee 10 p Eee 0 an a J 1 a Reset Interval Latest G Push BACK for previous screen Fuel economy record Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key then select the View key using the NISSAN controller The average fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous reset to reset period oA 0 6000 12000 18000 Maintenance items Press the INFO button and select the Mainte nance
323. ith an adapter e CDs that are not round e CDs with a paper label e CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges 4 50 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs It has no capability to record or burn CDs If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed CHECK DISC e Confirm that the CD is inserted cor rectly the label side is facing up etc Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive tem perature inside the player Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button After a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio sys tem only MP3 or WMA if so equipped CD CD DVD combination player models with Navigation System Do not force a disc into the CD DVD insert slot This could damage the CD DVD player During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD DVD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD DVD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compart ment temperature is extremely high Decrease the temperature before use Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round d
324. itions also can affect towing For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating The trans mission high fluid temperature protection mode which helps reduce the chance of transmission damage could activate and automatically de crease engine power Under some conditions engine and vehicle speed could be reduced Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions AWARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and lower vehicle speed Also when the high temperature mode oper ates engine and vehicle speed may be gradually reduced On highways the re duced speed may be lower than other traf fic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially careful when driv ing If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed pull to the side of the road in a safe area and allow the engine to cool or the transmission to return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual A CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties Total trailer load Tongue load Tongue load x 100 10 to 15 Total trailer load Tongue load Keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer T
325. iving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide 008 5 2 Three way catalyst evucanceetekewuvesebeiees ease 5 2 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS 5 3 Avoiding collision and rollover 05 5 5 Off road recovery i bc eccke Pena gn dee Saka eanae dea 5 5 Rapid air pressure lOSS nn nnana nanan 5 6 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving 5 6 Push Button lgnition Switch cscs cvereedtaccanamse 5 7 Push button ignition switch positions 5 8 Emergency engine shut off 00 eee 5 9 NISSAN Intelligent key battery discharge 5 9 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 5 10 Before starting the engine 20 00e 5 10 Starting the engine secu s sexes sss bd ee bee yak wane e ee 5 11 Driving the VENICIC lt 22d e840hsews sa cee she saywse us 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 11 Palm iG lake s 622d eseceeact do cueee sevaeete ners 5 18 Ciilse COMO PE E E pes 5 18 Precautions on cruise control 5 18 Cruise control operations 20 05 5 19 Break In schedule pccusceratecdvwesheseeeveceseaes 5 20 Increasing fuel economy 2 20e eee ee 5 20 Parking parking on hillS s 2 lt c0ceseeeed eadeceeaeen 5 21 Power StICCHNiGs 4 c 0 eeu teenecaceeecceesie ieee cease 5 22 Brake SVSICUN cca Super Hote RORE E et en 5 22 Brake precautions c
326. jack up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point Align the jack head between the two Raise the vehicle notches in the front or the rear as shown Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown The jack should be used on firm and level ground To lift the vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground Re move the wheel nuts and then remove the tire Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual 1 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be tween the wheel and hub 2 Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight 3 With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight In case of emergency 6 7 4 Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated E Lower the vehicle completely AWARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the
327. k noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction AWARNING The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is designed to help improve driving stabil ity but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur faces and always drive carefully Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are ex tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy namic Control system may not operate properly This could adversely affect ve hicle handling performance and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not stan dard equipment or are extremely dete riorated the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica tor light may come on When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on Do not drive on these types of roads When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light m
328. know how to operate it you can display the User Guide for confirmation You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which con tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 145 Information gt User Guide Getting Started Let s Practice Using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Placing Calls Help on Speaking 1 6 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument panel 2 Select the Others key 3 Select the Voice Recognition key NOTE You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing the 4 4 switch and saying Help 4 Select the User Guide key 5 Select an item Available items Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system Let s Practice Initiates a practice session that demon strates how to improve voice recognition by the system Using the Address Book Tutorial for using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Tutorial for entering a destination by street address Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation Help on Speaking Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the system 4 146 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Information gt User Guide 8 00 Using Voice Recognition With voice recognition you TALK can
329. l USB gt Menu Menu There are some options available during play back Select one of the following that are dis played on the screen if necessary Refer to the following information for each item Movie Playback Switch to the movie playback mode This item is displayed only when the USB memory contains movie files The shift selector must be in Park P with the parking brake engaged to watch movies from a USB device Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 89 Folder List Track List Displays the folder or track list The Movie Playback key is also displayed in this list screen and enables you to switch to the movie playback mode Play Mode Choose the preferred play mode using the NISSAN controller or the touchscreen Movie file operation Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the USB memory while watching the images DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory inserted the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and the USB memory is inserted press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode 4 90 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Operation keys To operate the USB memory select the desired key displayed on the display screen e SAL Pause Selectthe Il key to pause the movie file To resume
330. l air bag warning light ENGINE i i i ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL BRAKE or Brake warning light ry pp g g lig Nani g Charge warning light CVT Continuously Variable Transmission CVT indi He Security indicator light Z i cator light Engine oil pressure warning light i Continuously Variable Transmission CVT po f Slip indicator light sition indicator light Low tire pressure warning light CRUISE Cruise main switch indicator light Turn signal hazard indicator lights Master warning light Fog light indicator light if so equipped Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indicator light NISSAN Intelligent Key warning light Front passenger air bag status light CHECKING BULBS If equipped the following lights come on briefly If any light fails to come on it may indicate l l and then go off a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the eet wie eas aan ie i sat electrical system Have the system repaired and place the ignition switch in the position Wwe romotlv without starting the engine The following lights ABS r X R o CVT diii will come on w U WARNING LIGHTS EEPOS For additional information on warnings and indi CA erae or eC A cators see Vehicle information display later in this section 2 10 Instruments and controls ABS 1 O Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning l
331. l and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the ve hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro sion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use acceler ates the corrosion process Road salt also accel erates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation Check the underbody for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible A CAUTION e NEVER remove dirt sand or other de bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom Never allow water or ot
332. l turn off auto matically after a period of time To turn it on again press the DISC AUX button DVD operation keys When the DVD is playing without the operation screen being shown you may use the touch screen to select items from the displayed video You may also use the NISSAN controller to select an item from the displayed video When the op eration screen is being shown use the NISSAN controller or the touchscreen to select an item from the displayed menus AL PAUSE Select the Il sume playing the DVD use the gt key gt e Select the key to start playing the DVD or resume playing the DVD after it has been paused A es Select the E key to pause the DVD To re key to stop playing the DVD 44 gt p NEXT PREVIOUS CHAPTER Selectthe PP key to skip the chapter s of the disc forward Select the M4 key to skip the chapter s of the disc backward The chapters will advance forward or backward the number of times the respective key is touched or selected with the NISSAN controller Ki A CM SKIP This function is only for DVD VIDEO and DVD VR Selectthe I or l key to fast forward or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM settings For more information see DVD set tings in this section Next Prev This function is only for DVD AUDIO Select the or key to advance or rewind the still image The still image will advance or rewind the number of times the k
333. laying will be repeated 1 Track Repeat The track that is currently playing will be repeated 1 Folder Repeat The folder that is currently being accessed will be repeated All Disc Random All discs loaded will be played in a mixed order 1 Disc Random The tracks on the disc that is currently playing will be played in a mixed order 1 Folder Random The tracks in the folder that is currently being accessed will be played in a mixed order Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 67 SCAN button While listening to a CD press the SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD playing Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track CD EJECT Current Selected disc Press the amp button then press the slot number 1 6 for the desired disc The compact disc will be ejected If no slot num ber 1 6 is pressed the current loaded disc will be ejected If the ejected disc Is not removed within 15 seconds the disc will reload All discs Press and hold the amp button for more than 1 5 seconds The compact discs will be ejected one by one If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds or the amp button is pressed again during the eject sequence the entire disc eject sequence will be can celed When this button is pressed while a compact disc is being played the compact disc will ej
334. ld the brake pedal 7 Have someone retrieve and store the blocks While going downhill the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de crease overall stability Therefore to main tain adequate control reduce your speed and use the manual shift mode M5 Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending ahill as this reduces their effec tiveness and could cause overheating Shift ing the manual shift mode to M5 5th pro vides engine braking and reduces the need to brake as frequently If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this owner s manual Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle s first 500 miles 805 km For the first 500 miles 805 km that you do tow do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be prepared for possible ch
335. le in the Starting and driving section of this manual CRUISE Cruise main switch indicator light The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on the cruise control system is operational Front fog light indicator light if so equipped The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are ON See Fog light switch later in this section Se Front passenger air bag status OFF light The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used For front passenger air bag status light operation see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual HO High beam indicator light blue This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated ENGINE Malfunction indicator light MIL If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running it may indi cate a potential emission control and or CVT malfunction ENGINE SOON The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady if the fuel fille
336. le and trailer Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or prop erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds rough road surfaces or passing trucks AWARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be ca pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount Technical and consumer information 9 19 The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight Additionally the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer to
337. le the moonroof is closing Instruments and controls 2 47 A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area 2 48 Instruments and controls Sunshade To open the sunshade To fully open the sunshade push the switch C toward the open position until it reaches the first detent To fully open the sunshade and the moon roof together push the switch 1 toward the open position until it reaches the second detent To close the sunshade To fully close the sunshade push the switch 2 toward the close position until it reaches the second detent Pushing the switch 2 to the first detent will close the moonroof only If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroot REAR CONTROL CANCEL SWITCH if so equipped lt a ON REAR CONT CANCEL LIC1391 The rear control cancel switch operates when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON posi tion The rear control cancel switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel Pushing the rear control cancel switch to the CANCEL side will deactivate the following switches in the rear center armrest Automatic climate control Audio Pushing the rear control cancel switch to the ON side restores the control to the rear center arm rest REAR POWER SUN SHADE if so equipped
338. lectrical spark or a cigarette Hydro gen gas generated by the battery is ex plosive Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury After touch ing a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly wash your hands If the acid contacts your eyes skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce bat tery life and in some cases lead to an explosion When working on or near a battery al ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry Battery posts terminals and related ac cessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash hands after handling Keep battery out of the reach of children Do not tip the battery Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level ee WDI0224 1 Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown Use a cloth to protect the battery case 2 Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening Do not overfill Reinstall the vent caps Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under se
339. lic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunc tion it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 6 MPH 5 10 km h The speed varies according to road conditions Starting and driving 5 23 When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re quired while driving 5 24 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors
340. llite radio reception XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc COMPACT AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 49 Compact disc CD player models without Navigation System A CAUTION e Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD changer player Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and or CD changer Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time e Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD player sometimes cannot func tion when the compartment tempera ture is extremely high or low Decrease increase the temperature before use Do not expose the CD to direct sun light CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty scratched or covered with finger prints may not work properly The following CDs may not work prop erly e Copy control compact discs CCCD Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc tion 3 1 in 8 cm discs w
341. llow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint LRS0243 Top tether anchor point locations The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts See In stalling top tether strap later in this section If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat consult your NISSAN dealer for de tails Anchor points 4 are located on the rear parcel shelf Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 1 25 WRS0801 WRS0802 LRS0673 Rear facing web mounted step 2 Rear facing rigid mounted step 2 Rear facing step 3 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach 3 For child restraints that are equipped with ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check webbing mounted attachments remove any to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop additional slack from the anchor attach erly attached to the lower anchors ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the cent
342. llular phone at a time NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this sec tion Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and connecting You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position it may be impos sible to receive a call for a short period of time Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradatio
343. lly unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the A button Opening any doors Pushing the ignition switch The interior light illuminates for a maximum of 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the following op erations Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the remote controller Switching the room light switch to the OFF position Opening windows The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simulta neously To open the windows press the but ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked The door windows will open while pressing the button on the Intelligent Key The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key Releasing the trunk lid Press the button for longer than 0 5 sec onds to open the trunk lid The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the OFF position See Cancel switch in this section WPD0361 Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 2 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0
344. ls you then prompts you for a name again Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number Delete Entry Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook After the system rec ognizes the command speak the name to delete or say List Names to choose an entry List names Use the List Names command to hear all the
345. lting ina fire or an electric shock A CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the lens 4 34 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line are displayed on the monitor Distance guide lines Indicate distances from the vehicle body Red line f approx 1 5 ft 0 5 m Yellow line approx 3 ft 1 m Green line 3 approx 7 ft 2 m Green line approx 10 ft 3 m Vehicle width guide lines Indicate the vehicle width when backing up Predicted course lines Indicate the predicted course when backing up The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift selector is in the R Reverse position and the steering wheel is turned The predicted course lines will move de pending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steer ing wheel is in the neutral position HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES AWARNING Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly Use the displayed lines as a reference The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants fuel level vehicle position road conditions and road grade If the tires are replaced with different sized tires the predicted course lines
346. m lt lt sere weenie ee emdawden meee eae 4 148 Before starting se eceeewresgucerenseeens neesee 4 148 Giving voice COMMANCS s4i0c62e0sceueedavescen 4 149 NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Command Mode 200200 cce0s Casendeteed sania ewe 4 157 USING he Syste wcccceuctdncunenecencaueeaues 4 162 Speaker Adaptation function 00e0 eee 4 165 Troubleshooting guide 22 2005 4 167 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING Positioning of the heating or air condi tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or der that full attention may be given to the driving operation e Do not disassemble or modify this sys tem If you do it may result in accidents fire or electrical shock Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or lack of sound Continued use of the system may result in accident fire or electric shock In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware spill liquid on it or notice smoke or smell coming from it stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents fire or electrical shock h STATUS button P 4 6 5 BRIGHT brightness control button 2 INFO button P 4 7 6 BRIGHT brightness control button 3 NISSAN controller P 4 5 7 5 BACK previous butto
347. m the default 12 hour display to a 24 hour display Offset hour Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the hours Offset minute Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the minutes Daylight Savings Time When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated daylight savings time is on To turn off the daylight savings time touch the ON key the amber indicator light will go out Settings gt Time Zone 8 00 Atlantic ON Newfoundland ON 1 8 Time Zone Select the Time Zone key the Time Zone screen will appear Select one of the following zones depending on the current location by selecting the correct time zone key to enable that time zone indicator light will illuminate for that location Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic Newfoundland Hawaii e Alaska After selection settings press the BACK button or any other mode button to accept the changes Settings gt Others 8 00 Adjust comfort amp convenience settings Others settings Select the Others key using the NISSAN con troller Voice recognition language and units set ting screen will be displayed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 27 Settings gt Comfort 8 00 Light Sensitivity Pecos a ss gt Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Light Off Delay Selective Door Unlock Cabin lighting when unlocking doors Comfort setting
348. mat In this case please say the To exit hold the TALK switch To exit hold the TALK switch area code first and then follow the prompts Do not add a 1 in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers Please say the last 4 digits or say Manual Controls Change Number lf the system does not recognize your com 8 The system announces Please say the last 10 The system announces Dial or Change mand please try repeating the command four digits or say change number Number using a natural voice Speaking too slowly or 9 Say 6200 11 Say Dial too loudly may further decrease recognition performance 12 The system makes a call to 800 662 6200 NOTE You can also speak 800 662 6200 10 continuous digits or 662 6200 7 con tinuous digits if the area code is not nec essary However the 3 3 4 digit grouping is recommended for improved recognition See How to speak numbers in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 155 Voice Recognition 8 00 Sy aj Navigation Practice 4 Information Practice F Audio To exit nold the TALK switch WHA1332 LHA1333 Example 2 Placing an international call 2 The system announces Would you like to to the phone number 011 81 111 222 3333 access Phone Navigation Information Au dio or Help 1 Pressthe amp switch located on the steer ing wheel 3 Say
349. mat created by Mi crosoft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file 4 54 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once Is called a multisession e ID3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag infor mation is displayed on the Artist song title line on the display Windows Windows Media and Windows Vista are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other coun tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA Playback order Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated The names of folders not co
350. matically into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc DISC button When the DISC button is pressed with the sys tem off and a compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded with the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play 44 gt gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the SEEK CAT M4 button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the TRACK P button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will ad vance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks when a CD is playing 44 gt SEEK CAT and TRACK Rewind and Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT M4 rewind button
351. mation 3 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the rear parcel shelf 4 Refer to the appropriate child restraint in stallation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap LRS0865 LRS0243 F If you have any questions when installing a Forward facing step 10 INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP top tether strap consult your NISSAN 10 If the child restraint is installed in the front dealer for details passenger seat place the ignition switch in First secure the child restraint with the LATCH the ON position The front passenger airbag ower anchors rear outboard seat positions only status light should illuminate If this the seat belt as applicable light is not illuminated see Front passenger 1 Flip up the anchor cover C from the anchor air bag and status light in this section point which is located directly behind the Move the child restraint to another child seat seating position Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted the ALR mode child re straint mode is canceled Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats AWARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away
352. mation rot or loose connections Underbody The underbody is frequently ex posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody otherwise rust may form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thor oughly flushed with plain water in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated See the Appearance and care section of this manual Window washer fluid Check that there is ad equate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general precau tions which should be closely observed AWARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface ap ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving Move the shift selector to P Park Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs If you must work with the engine run ning keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle e Always wear eye prote
353. may not be displayed correctly 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 4 56 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the CD USB device was inserted correctly Check if the CD is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and compressed audio files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Cannot play Files with extensions other than MP3 or WMA cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ ing application or other text editing applications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the CD USB device is protected by copyright Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file level
354. mers 1 800 387 0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information Your name address and telephone number Vehicle identification number attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer s name Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at For U S customers Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e mail at For U S customers nnaconsumeraffairs nissan usa com For Canadian customers information centre nissancanada com We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags seat belts and child restraints 0 2 Instrument Pallels cwenchtedee stands edated auc de cee sss 0 6 21 9 ae 06 8 eae ene eee ee 0 3 Engine compartmen
355. mmands without difficulty If problems are en countered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number 1 until the problem is resolved Symptom System fails to interpret the command correctly The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book Solution 1 Ensure that the command is valid See List of voice commands in this section 2 Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone 3 Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 6 If the system consistently fails to recognize commands the voice training procedure should be carried out to im prove the recognition response for the speaker See Speaker adaptation SA mode in this section 1 Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored This can be confirmed by using the List Names command See Phonebook in this section 2 Replace one of the names being confused with a new name 4 132 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE
356. move any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack WRS0698 Forward facing step 8 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 9 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 8 2 If necessary raise or remove the headrest to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback If the headrest is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the headrest when the child restraint is re moved See Adjustable headrest in this section for headrest adjustment removal and installation infor
357. move smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film A CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electri cal conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp ened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used If not removed road salt can discolor the wheels Appearance and care 7 3 A CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as am bient temperature Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub ber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with the coating and
358. n Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above 4 92 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems XXXXXX XXXXXX Ji XXXXXX Shuffle Off Repeat Off Audio main operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Press the AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the iPod AUX button When the AUX button is pressed with the system off and the iPod connected the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected press the AUX button re peatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode XXXXXX XXXXXX SA XXXXXX 0 02 Shuffle Off Repeat One i Use lt or gt buttons to move between left right menus Interface The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod in terface Use the NISSAN controller and the BACK button to play the iPod with your favorite settings The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual e Playlists Podcasts Songs Albums Artists Genres Composers Audiobooks The following keys shown on the screen are also available MENU returns to the previous screen e Pil plays pauses the musi
359. n P 4 5 4 8 _ 12 OFF brightness control button SETTING button P 4 9 P 4 15 4 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water To clean the display never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will discharge the battery and the engine will not start Reference symbols ENTER button This is a button on the control panel Example Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown on the display These keys can only be selected using the NISSAN controller HOW TO USE THE NISSAN CONTROLLER Use the NISSAN controller to choose an Item on the display screen Highlight an item on the dis play using the main directional buttons 2 or the center dial Then press the ENTER button to select the it
360. n the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos sible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic con trol system harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult a NISSAN dealer 4 118 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Q Bluetooth Ill microphone location Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive
361. n allows up to two out of dialect users to train the system to improve rec ognition accuracy By repeating a number of commands the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for each connected phone Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows 1 Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location 2 Sit in the driver s seat with the engine run ning the parking brake on and the transmis sion in P Park Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 129 3 Press and hold the Cx than 5 seconds button for more 4 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND f amp button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END button to select a dif ferent language 5 Press the 4 button For information on selecting a different lan guage see Choosing a language in this section 6 Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically If both memory locations are already in use the system will prompt you to overwrite one Follow the instructions pro vided by the system 7 When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin press the 4 button 8 The SA mode will be explained Follow the instructions provided by the system 9 When training is finished the system will tell you an
362. n and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones 4 134 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems If the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone owner s manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones If reception between callers is unclear ad justing the incoming or outgoing call volume may Improve the clarity See Call volume in this section REGULATORY INFORMATION BLUETOOTH is a FCC Regulatory information trademark owned by Settings 8 00 CAUTION To maintain compliance with amp Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc Navigation sumed Beans FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the U S A and licensed supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna to Clarion Display modification or a
363. n lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door 2 Close all doors handle request switch within the range of opera on 3 Push any door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you 4 All doors and the trunk will lock 5 The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments NOTE Doors lock with the door handle request switch when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open However doors lock with the me chanical key even if any door is open Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you However when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle doors can be locked with an other Intelligent Key A CAUTION After locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles or the trunk opener switch When locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been
364. n oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operating conditions A CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Op erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 TEN R LDI0641 C a CHANGING ENGINE OIL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Place a large drain pan under the drain plug A under the body Remove the oil filler cap inside the en gine compartment by turning it counter clockwise Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oll If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Changing engine oil filter later in this section Waste oil must be disposed of prop erly Check your local regulations AWARNING Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer e Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep used engine oil out of reach of children A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself
365. n returns to automatic driving mode When the shift selector is shifted from D Drive to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving the transmission enters the manual shift mode Shift ranges can be se lected manually Shift ranges can also be se lected using the shift paddles if so equipped on the steering wheel 8 and In the manual shift mode the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter When shifting the shift selector to the manual shift gate the position indicator displays 1 first up to 6 sixth depend ing on vehicle speed Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows 12836486586 M6 6th Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds M5 5th Use this position when driving up long slopes or for engine braking when driving down long slopes M4 4th M3 3rd and M2 2nd Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades M1 First Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 6 range This reduces fuel economy When shifting up Move the shift selector to the up side Shifts to higher range When shifting down Move the shift selector to the down side Shifts to lower range Moving the shift
366. n switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the amp switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes the display will show the mes sage System not ready or a beep sounds Before starting To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice Voice Recognition 8 00 Recognition observe the following 3 oo i J Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as T TE possible Close the windows to eliminate the ay NGT surrounding noises traffic noises vibration Siac sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands cor F Audio rectly Alternate Command Mode ON When the climate control is in the AUTO To exit hold the TALK switch mode the fan speed decreases automati cally for easy recognition Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command Giving voice commands 2 A list of commands appears on the screen Speak in a natural voice without pausing and the system announces Please say a Ae wacker 1 Press and release the switch located command from the displayed list or say Help on the steering wheel chourall commande 3 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changesfrom to B speak a command 4 Once acommand is recognized the system will announce the recognized command and perform the r
367. n system at any time lt gt TUNING SWITCH While using the voice recognition system tilt the tuning switch up or down to manually control the phone system if so equipped GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition For ad ditional command options refer to List of voice commands in this section Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System using English Spanish or French To change the language perform the following 1 Press and hold the 6 than 5 seconds 2 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND f button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END _ button to select a dif ferent language button for more 3 Press the button For information on speaker adaptation see Speaker adaptation SA mode in this sec tion 4 The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan guage to Spanish in Spanish or French in French Use the following chart to select the language NOTE You must press the 4 button or the button within 5 seconds to change the language Press l PHONE SEND to select Press ih Current language PHONE END to select English Engish Engish 5 Ifyou decide not to change the language do not press
368. ncorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle e Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or painted surfaces Battery fluid is a cor rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything imme diately flush the contacted area with water e Keep battery out of the reach of children The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle Whenever working on or near a battery Vehicle being jump started always wear suitable eye protectors for RX A a my ff example goggles or industrial safety S spectacles and remove rings metal K Sy bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause se rious injury Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan It could come on at any Vehicle with gt lt time Keep hands and other objects a battery for LP away from it Cloth booster WCE0054 3 Remove the vent caps on the battery if so AAWARNING equipped Cover the battery with an old Always follow the instructions below cloth to reduce explosion hazard Fail
369. nd Mode screens NOTE Please note that in this mode the recognition Any digit input format is available in the SUCCess rate may be affected as the number of International Number input process as available commands and ways of speaking each well as the special characters such as star command are increased You can turn this mode pound and plus ON or OFF When this mode is activated the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 157 Alternate Command Mode Adjust comfort amp convenience settings Guide the usage of Voice Recognition User Guide Speaker Adaptation Change the mode of Voice Recognition LHA1331 Activating Alternate Command Mode 4 Select the Alternate Command Mode key 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru 5 The confirmation message is displayed on ment panel the screen Select the OK key to activate the Alternate Command Mode 2 Select the Others key on the display 3 Select the Voice Recognition key 4 158 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 6 Alternate Command Mode is activated and the setting menu is expanded to include the Alternate Command Mode options See Settings menu in this section for an expla nation of the options Displaying the command list If you are controlling the system by voice com mands for the first time or do not
370. nd clearance is reduced To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation 000 cee eee ee ees 9 3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 9 5 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 1s ceed cece dude need sw ceeded es 9 6 SDECIICAUCNS poserer eiris eo evewsadanee eed ea pes 9 7 FENOME recrsicerrainias niise patane ARAARA 9 7 Wheels and tires aannnnnn nananana 9 8 Dimensions and weights suussaan aaa 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another COUR cccuriducticcu nes bennseaeeuoesecaas 9 9 Vehicle identification s 6 cesie ve cs tees ervtee viene cuns 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle identification number chassis NUMBCl 2522 lt uctvcanedudonse vg ranana 9 9 Engine serial number 000 cence eee ee 9 10 F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 10 Tire and loading information label 9 11 Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Installing front license plate 9 11 Vehicle loading information 2 22 05 9 12 i E eee a neteds E E EE noe e608 9 12 Vehicle load capacity 20220e
371. ne Provides more information if available about the menu selection currently high lighted for example Manually set the time zone HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTON To display the status of the audio climate control system and fuel consumption press the STATUS button The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pressed multiple times Audio Audio and climate control system Audio and fuel consumption Audio Information 2 00 Fuel Economy Maintenance HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button The display screen shows vehicle information for your convenience The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle See the following for details Information gt Fuel Economy Distance to Empty Avg kk k Fuel Econ id Oo Gajo MPG No D o Fuel Econ History c o m o 0 3 oO Y LHA1301 Fuel economy Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key using the NISSAN controller to display Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy History Distance to empty MI or km The Distance to Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE d
372. ne hood AWARNING If steam or water is coming from the en gine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing or loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the en gine AWARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling fan can start at any time 6 After the engine cools down check the cool ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could dam age your vehicle Towing instructions are avail able from a NISSAN dealer Local service opera tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions AWARNING Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed Neve
373. ne should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver PROGRAMMING HOMELINK 1 To begin press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons to clear the memory until the indicator light blinks after 20 seconds Release both buttons 2 Position the end of the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Instruments and controls 2 53 3 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held transmitter but ton DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed 4 Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink This could take up to 90 seconds When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flash ing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other pro 2 54 Instruments and controls grammed device press and hold the pro grammed HomeLink button releasing when the device begins to activate 5 Ifthe indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another per son for convenience
374. ng so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be tween 25 89 MPH 40 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal To turn on the cruise control push the ON OFF switch on The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel will illuminate To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle maintains the set speed e To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle returns to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed use one of the following three methods Push the CANCEL button Tap the brake pedal Push the ON OFF switch off The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel goes out The cruise control is automatically canceled if you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL RES or SET COAST switch The preset speed is deleted from memory the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH 13 km h below the set speed you move the shift selector to N Neutral To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the veh
375. ngine to assist steering If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks you will still have control of the vehicle However much greater steering effort is needed especially in sharp turns and at low speeds AWARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate 5 22 Starting and driving BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking at 2 wheels BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis tance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brake pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control AWARNING While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or accel erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident
376. ngue level with the ground Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han dling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake sys tem Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2 000 Ib 909 kg 9 20 Technical and consumer information You may add Class trailer hitch equipment that has a 2 000 Ib 909 kg maximum weight rating to the vehicle but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load Specification chart earlier in this section A CAUTION Do not use axle mounted hitches The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact absorbing bumper Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys tem brake system etc to install a trailer hitch To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear where practical remove the receiver when not in use After the hitch is removed seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes water or dust from entering the pass
377. nnect the call from the cellular phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free System press the button Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice NOTE If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice 4 126 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Phonebook phones without automatic phonebook download function NOTE The Transfer Entry command is not avail able when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phonebook Transfer Entry Delete Entry List Names For phones that do not support automatic down load of the phonebook PBAP Bluetooth pro file the Phonebook command is used to manu ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each phone connected to the system NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B Transfer entry Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tel
378. not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in 142 5 cm tall and weighs between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 Ibs 36 kg A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoul der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo men The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck use the shoulder belt without the booster seat CHILD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 21 AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in structions for proper use and installa tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other pas
379. note Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT TED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio late these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote MusiclD Service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusiclD ser vice to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote MusiclD Service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote make
380. ntaining MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display lf there is a file in the top level of the disc Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order FOLDER MP3 or WMA WHA1078 Playback order chart Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 55 Specification chart Supported media CD CD R CD RW USB 2 0 CD CD R CD RW ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista operating system based Supported file systems computer are not supported UDF Bridge UDF 1 02 ISO9660 UDF 1 5 UDF 2 0 VDF 1 5 VDF 2 0 packet writing is not supported USB memory FAT16 FAT32 MPEGT MPEG MPEG25 Sampling frequency frequency 8 kHz 48 kHz Supported Heii o rate 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 2 versions WMA7 WMA8 8 kHz 48 KFZ 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 2 TEETE Folder levels Folder levels 8 Folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Text character number limitation 64 characters 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 LE 04 UNICODE UTF 16 BE 05 UNI Displayable character codes 3 CODE UTF 8 1 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 2 When VBR files are played the playback time
381. nuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid sect wee to ae aaa 8 11 Engine Coolant 26424246 2 yea 8 7 Engine oil seat oes bee ee ee ee 8 9 Power steering fluid 8 12 Window washer fluid 8 13 F M V S S certification label 9 10 Fog light switch 0 2 32 Folding rearseat 004 1 5 Front air bag system See supplemental restraint system 1 46 Froni Sales 4 4 06 4 40 2 o es oe ae PS 1 2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants a ee ek wee ee 9 2 Fuel economy 2 0 08 ee eee 5 20 Fuel gauge 6 0 8 beh So eee ee eG 2 6 Fuel octane rating 9 4 Fuel recommendation a aa aoaaa aa 9 3 Fuel filler door and cap 3 21 FUSOS e o eea 4 aig a ee a ede oe ee 8 21 Fusible links 2 20000048 8 22 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal Transceiver aoaaa a 2 53 Gas Cap o gos 6 eas a e ee a aa 3 21 Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Fuel gauge naaa ee 2 6 Odometer a s sa s aeaa nwa ea a 2 4 Speedometer naaa 000 2 4 Tachometer aoaaa aa ae 2 5 Trip odometer aoaaa aaa ae 2 4 General maintenance oaoa a 8 2 Glove DON sa saae aaea a aia y Bom a a 2 39 Glove box lock aaoo wee ee ee 2 39 Grocery MOCKS 2 sa os u 43 8 e a eana ea 2 41 H Hands free phone system BIUGIOOIN 64845 4nd hao a od 4 118 4 133 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 33 Headlight and turn signal switch
382. nuts to become loose Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve hicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 83 ft lb 112 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times It is recom mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval 6 8 Incase of emergency Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver s door opening 5 Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip ment in the vehicle 6 Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire 7 Close the trunk AWARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se cured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop The spare tire is designed for emer gency use See specific instructions un der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the instructions and precautions below must be fol lowed AWARNING If done i
383. o phone and voice recognition systems USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the amp switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes voice commands will not be ac cepted Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec ognition initialization is completed BEFORE STARTING To get the best recognition performance from Voice Recognition observe the following The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noise and vi bration sounds etc which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Speak in a natural conversational voice with out pausing between words lf the air conditioner is set to Auto the fan speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be recognized more easily GIVING VOICE COMMANDS 1 Pressthe amp ing wheel switch located on the steer 8 00 Sy U Phone aj Navigation Voice Recognition 4 information W Audio To exit nold the TALK switch 2 A list of commands appears on the screen and the system announces Would you like to access Phone Navigation Information Audio or Help After the tone sounds and
384. o adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the con trast to lower or higher The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button 4 10 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Push DAY NIGHT button to resume display Display off Select the Display ON key The amber indicator next to Display ON turns off and the message above will be displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control panel is operated the dis play turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished Otherwise the screen turns off auto matically after 5 seconds To turn the screen on Press the SETTING button select the Dis play key and then select the Display ON key Then set the screen to on by pressing the ENTER button or Hold the 2 OFF button for approxi mately 2 seconds and the message resum ing display will appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on no am ber indicator Background color Select the Background Color key the display color changes between day and night The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Settings gt Switch
385. o the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water To clean the display never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction To help ensure safe driving some functions can not be operated while driving The on screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper ate the navigation system AWARNING e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident 4 18 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings 8 00 Volume amp Beeps Display Navigation Adjust navigation settings Touch screen operation With this system the same operations as those for the NISSAN controller are possible using the touch screen operat
386. ob or the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position the sys tem will not arm Even when the driver and or passen gers are in the vehicle the system will activate with all the doors hood and trunk lid locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position the system will be released Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after ap proximately 50 seconds However the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver s door or trunk lid with the key or by pressing the button on the Intelli gent Key The alarm is activated by opening the door or trunk lid without using the key or Intelligent Key even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver s door or the trunk lid with the key pressing the button on the Intelligent Key or press ing the request switch on the driver s or passen ger s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key If the engine fails to start using
387. od is completely closed and latched before driving Fail ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury do not open the hood TRUNK LID AWARNING e Do not drive with the trunk lid open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys E J Ee LPD0394 OPENER OPERATION A WARNING e Do not drive with the trunk lid open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys To open the trunk lid push the opener switch down To close the trunk lid lower and push the trunk lid down securely NOTE You can open the trunk lid
388. of The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front the moonroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down the moonroof will im mediately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re peats opening or tilting up the moonroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the moonroof will fully close gradually Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof AWARNING In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or whi
389. of part way push the switch in any direction while the moonroof is sliding to stop it in the desired position Tilting the moonroof Close the moonroof by pushing the switch toward lt 2 Release the switch then push the switch toward gt again to tilt the moonroof up To tilt the moonroof down push the switch toward L gt D A WARNING in an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the moonroof The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their h
390. of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION WT10171 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number VIN plate is attached as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The vehicle identification number is located as shown Technical and consumer information 9 9 WT10172 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F M V S S C M V S S CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel is affixed as shown This label contains valu able vehicle information such as Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully The number is stamped on the engine as shown 9 10 Technical and consumer information EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at tached to the underside of the hood as shown INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and The air conditioner specification label is affixed to Loading Information label The label is located as the underside of the hood as shown shown Technical and c
391. of voice Slow Good Fast Speed Eariy Goog Late Start of speaking To initiate a practice session access the User Guide and select the Let s Practice key Follow the on screen prompts until the session is com plete After the session is completed a screen will be displayed that shows an analysis of differ ent elements of your speech Select the Try Again to repeat the session if improvement is needed Select the Done key to return to the User Guide screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 147 Information gt User Guide 8 00 Tips on Speaking Commands Say commands when there are minimal background sounds Say voice commands clearly Avoid talking slow or with long pauses Say commands after the tone Useful tips for correct operation You can display useful speaking tips to help the system recognize your voice commands cor rectly 1 Select Help on Speaking 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller or touching the page down key Settings gt Voice Recognition 8 00 User Guide Alternate Command Mode Guide the usage of Voice Recognition LHA1331 Voice recognition settings The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec ognition system are described 1 Select Voice Recognition 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller 4 148 Monitor climate audi
392. oice recognition systems Information 8 00 Fuel Economy Weather Info Maintenance Map Update Where am 1 Navigation Version Traffic Info Others Show distance to empty and fuel economy HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button the display screen shows vehicle and navigation information for your con venience The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle See the following for details Information gt Fuel Economy 8 00 Distance To Empty Avg Fuel Econ Reset Fuel Eco kk ye Fuel Eco History E MPG Fuel economy Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key using the NISSAN controller to display Distance to Empty Average Fuel Economy and Fuel Economy History Distance to empty MI or km The Distance to Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE display will change to NOTE If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small the dis play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may con tinue to be displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display
393. ointed out to the person performing the mainte nance The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle AWARNING Once a front air bag side air bag or curtain air bag has inflated the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced Additionally if any of the front air bags inflate the activated pretensioner must also be replaced The air bag module and pretensioner should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The air bag module and pretensioner cannot be repaired 1 54 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The front air bag side air bag curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle If you need to dispose of the supple mental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury MEMO Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 55 2 Instruments and controls instrument panele sa ciuieasccdewde tegen teeercaene 2 2 Meters and gauges cicero eed dvcaeced ede ceaedaeetee 2 3 Speedometer and odometer 0ce eens 2 4 TACROMCI Sl cc es nacawd cae eeee saeieeceescan tears 2 5 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 PUPS Kelir R ooeuee ee aeras 2 6 Compass display if so equipped
394. olding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you continue to have programming difficulties please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared However to clear all programming press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device t
395. ollows Unoccupied passenger s seat The 2 is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Passenger s seat occupied by a small adult child or child restraint as outlined in this section The 2 illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meets the conditions outlined in this section The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag Is opera tional Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to auto matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U S regulations If the front passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag to be auto matically turned OFF Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor pattern sensor It is in the bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight It works together with seat belt sensors described
396. ols 2 43 of N LIC0410 Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation press the window switch down only driver s side shown to the second detent and release it it need not be held The window auto matically opens all the way To stop the window lift the switch up while the window is opening To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation pull the switch up to the second detent and release it it need not be held To stop the window press the switch down while the window is closing 2 44 instruments and controls Auto reverse function The auto reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc curs A WARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the window If the vehicle s battery is disconnected replaced or jump started the power window auto reverse function may not operate properly If this occurs please contact the dealer to re initialize the power window auto reverse system If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing the window will be immediately low
397. ommand The system will prompt you to continue en tering digits if desired Example 1 800 662 6200 Say pause for a 2 second pause available only when storing a phone book number M j NOTE One eight zero zero t Its h The system repeats the numbers and casio de S say phone numbers as prompts you to enter more The voice command Help is available at any time Please use the Help command to get The system repeats the numbers and information on how to use the system CONTROL BUTTONS prompts you to enter more six six two The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands six two zero zero Free Phone System are located on the steering e Say pound for H Say star for hen avail wheel able when using the Special Dialing com C4 PHONE SEND mand and the Send command during a Press the CS button to initiate a call l l VR session or answer an incoming See List of voice commands and Special call Dialing in this section for more information 4 122 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems You can also use the f button to interrupt the system feedback and give acommand at once See List of voice commands and During a call in this section for more information a PHONE END While the voice recognition sys tem Is active press and hold the button for 5 seconds to quit the voice recognitio
398. ompressed audio files CD only the current folder is repeated 1 Folder Random compressed audio files CD only tracks from the current folder are played randomly CD gt Play Mode 8 00 CD gt Folder List CD gt Track List 1 Folder Repeat ON 1 Track Repeat ON 1 Disc Randem ON XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXA mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 1 Folder Random ON XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 Normal Plays all tracks on the CD in sequential Folder List Track List order until stopped The folders on the disc are displayed Select the The tracks on the disc are displayed Select the key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from key of a track name to begin playing that track that folder Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 81 When the amp button is pressed while the CD gt Title Text Priority 8 00 compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off Title Text Priority Record to Music Box Automatic Recording Recording Quality For more information about these options see Music Box Hard Drive Audio System with Navigation System in this section 4 CD EJECT button Whenthe amp button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected 4 82 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems AUX auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are located inside
399. onal injury Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak ing distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the _ vehicle s warranty MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not ex ceed either of the gross axle weight rat ings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label If weight ratings are exceeded move or re move items to bring all weights below the ratings Technical and consumer information 9 15 TOWING A TRAILER AWARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents A CAUTION Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged For the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other pa
400. onitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 99 neces Music Box gt Music Music Box gt Music Library 8 00 Music Box gt Music Library 8 00 Music Box gt Music Box Settings 8 00 Yooo A y peo El TensferTitestromuss I8 El Music Box Used Free Space Ea Ea e E f rewas EI cracerore vaavasevesn _ d 2 All Songs WHA1371 Artists Play tracks by an artist whose music is Cur rently being played The artists are stored in alphabetical order Genres Play tracks by genre by selecting from the displayed list All Songs Play tracks from all recorded tracks The tracks are stored in alphabetical order E F Transfer Titles from USB Update the in vehicle Gracenote Database using a USB memory device Search the title from information acquired on the Internet Visit www nissanusa com gracenote for details Transfer Missing Titles to USB Transfer the information of an album re corded without titles to the USB memory Visit www nissanusa com gracenote for details Update Missing Titles Search the title using the database in the hard disk 4 100 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems F Music Box settings To set up the Music Box Hard Drive audio system to your preferred settings select the Menu key with the NISSAN controller during playback Then select the Music Box Settings key with the NISSAN controller Music Box Used Fr
401. ons on supplemental restraint SYS EM woy 4 96 Ge iow amp oe ed A 1 39 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Programmable features 4 9 4 24 PUSH Stan NG e ars 3 wn de ane G io we ae 6 10 R Radio Car phone or CB radio 4 118 Compact Disc CD changer 4 66 FM AM radio with compact disc CD Changer s ia be Se Woe ene bok woe ee 4 64 FM AM SAT radio with CD DVD player 4 75 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player odo kb ee eae ke aww 4 69 Rear audio controls 4 116 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 114 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 0 0000 ee ee 9 26 Rear audio controls oaoa oaoa a a a aa 4 116 Rear power windows saasaa oaa aaa 2 43 Rear seal aoad oa eae a ae a 125 Rear seat air conditioner 4 47 Rear sun shade 244 2 49 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWG e a e e a a ee a ee ee oS 2 27 RearView Monitor 5805 4 34 Recorders Event data 2 eeh ba dae ene a amp RGR 9 27 Refrigerant recommendation 9 6 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 9 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 Resetting the fuel economy 4 7 4 21 S Safety Child safety rear door lock 3 6 Child seat belts 1 21 1 27 1 32 1 36 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 Seat adjustment Front power seat adjustment 1 3 Seat belt Child Sates
402. onsumer information 9 11 Use the following steps to mount the front license plate Q Make holes on the plastic finisher at the location mark small dimple using a 0 31 in 8 mm drill Apply light pressure to the drill Install the license plate holder using the two screws provided with the holder 2 Mount the license plate using two M6 14mm bolts License plate bolt tightening torque 3 8 4 7 ft lb 5 10 6 37 N m 9 12 Technical and consumer information VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION AWARNING it is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle Curb Weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment flu ids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle pas sengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other opt
403. ontroller the display Settings gt Select Units 12 00 Aa y E i iE wC_ f F Select Units Select the US mi F MPG key or the Metric km C L 100 km key to change the units shown on the display 2 OFF BUTTON To change the display brightness press the lt gt OFF button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display The brightness can then be adjusted using the NISSAN controller The display brightness can also be adjusted us ing the brighter button or the dimmer button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 15 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped If no operation is done within 10 seconds the display will return to the previous display Press and hold the 2 OFF button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off Press the button again to turn the display on 1 ZOOM OUT button 2 STATUS button P 4 20 3 DEST button 4 ROUTE button 4 16 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems os 2S Yl NISSAN controller P 4 17 INFO button P 4 20 PHONE button brightness control button 9 D2 OFF brightness control button P 4 31 10 brightness control button 11 VOICE button 12 SETTING button P 4 24 13 MAP button 14 2 BACK previous button P 4 17 15 ZOOM IN button For Navigation
404. or Male scien uted wet cede nie ees ewes cures aes 7 5 Seal DCS ac danse de eeek eG eunn ee erR ANAE 7 6 Corrosion protection s s sss rsss aac yere staees et 7 6 Most common factors contributing to vehicle COMOSION aree EERIE EEE ET REARS 7 6 Environmental factors influence the rate of CONOS ON eeraa ra rR NAERAN FRERE ARRAN FARRAR 7 6 To protect your vehicle from corrosion 7 6 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve hicle it is important to take proper care of it To protect the paint surfaces please wash your vehicle as soon as you Can after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants such as soot bird drop pings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care A CAUTION Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent
405. or example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following pro cedure 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 5 10 Starting and driving 2 Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least whenever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are clean Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition Also check tires for proper inflation Lock all doors Position seat and adjust head restraints and headrests if so equipped Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position See Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and
406. or is displayed on the screen See RearView Monitor in this section for more information Image viewer settings For information about these settings refer to Image viewer in this section 4 30 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Navigation settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual for information regarding these settings Audio settings For audio settings refer to Audio System in this section Phone settings For phone settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section Bluetooth settings For Bluetooth phone settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section For Bluetooth audio settings refer to Bluetooth streaming audio in this section Volume amp beeps settings Navigation volume For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual for infor mation regarding these settings Phone volume For phone volume settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation Sys tem in this section 8 00 Settings gt Volume amp Beeps Audio Volume L cccccscccoey Q Guidance Volume PO rcccccccsce lereccecceseeg gt loccccccccseeg ie gt Use volume knob to adjust during playback Ringtone Incoming Call Outgoing Call Switch beeps With t
407. ossible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged 5 20 Starting and driving INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position Drive at moderate speeds on the highway Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking Maintain a safe distance behind other ve hicles Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions On level roads shift into high gear as soon as possible Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended periodic mainte nance schedule Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres sure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the wheels in correct alignment Im proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy Use the air conditioner only when necessary When cruising at highway speeds it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag Use the recommended viscosity engine oll See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual PARKING PARKING ON HILLS AWARNING e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and
408. ot be used in the front passenger seat Keep seatbacks as upright as pos sible after fitting the child restraint Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child re straint while in the vehicle When the child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt In a sudden stop or colli sion loose objects can injure occu pants or damage the vehicle A CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating sur face and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system referred to as the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem Some child restraints include rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be con nected to these anchors For details see LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem later in this section If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes When se lecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and
409. otection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag NISSAN recommends that pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode child restraint mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passen ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF See Child restraints earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation because of the object s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the seat or if two children are on the seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au tomatically turned
410. ountry or Rock Station specific text If the station broadcasts RDS information the text information is automatically displayed Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play 44 gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the SEEK CAT M4 button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 79 times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the TRACK PP button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Pres
411. owing conditions Receiving a call on the Hands Free Phone System Checking the connection to the hands free phone Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 53 Do not place the Bluetooth audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle Bluetooth module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless con nection disruption While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual This system supports the Bluetooth Audio Distribution Profile A2DP AVRCP BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Clarion amp Bluetooth CD or USB with Compressed Audio Files models without Navigation System The file types supported by this system are MP3 and WMA Explanation of terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10 1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio for
412. p a keypad enter digits when needed For example entering your PIN number for voice mail NOTE Pushing the TALK switch on the steering wheel during a call allows num bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec ognition Cancel Mute This will appear after the Mute key is selected Mute will be cancelled To adjust the person s voice to be louder or quieter press the volume control switch located on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone This adjustment is also available in the SETTING mode Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 141 o mmu 8 00 Call in Progress Y 0 04 Use Handset f XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX ENDING A CALL To finish the call perform one of the following procedures Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress display Push the wheel switch on the steering When the Call in Progress screen is dis played press the PHONE button on the instrument panel to hang up If any other screen is currently displayed press the PHONE button to display the Call in Progress screen first then press the PHONE button again to hang up 4 142 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Phone Go Mma 8 00 Edit Vehicle Phonebook Delete Phonebook Download Handset Phonebook Volume amp Ringtone Auto Downloaded 1 5
413. p tether strap 00 e eee 1 35 BOOSIE Seale 44 cns coven i e a a weed ens 1 36 Supplemental restraint system 0 cee eee eee 1 39 Precautions on supplemental restraint ee EE E E ey suered ou uetas 1 39 Supplemental air bag warning labels 1 53 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 53 SEATS Sit upright and well back AWARNING e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly See Precau tions on seat belt usage later in this section After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the pas senger sits well back and straight up in the seat If
414. persists consult your local dealership Unplayable File The file may be copy protected The file is not MP3 WMA AAC M4A or DIVX type Region Invalid The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 51 e Use DVDs with a region code 1 ALL or 1 included for your DVD entertainment system The region code A is displayed as a small sym bol printed on the top of the DVD This vehicle installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a re gion code other than 1 or ALD This copyright protected technology cannot be used without a permit from Macrovision Corporation It is limited to personal use etc as long as the permit from Macrovision Corporation is not issued Modifying or disassembling is prohib ited Dolby digital is manufactured under li cense from Dolby Laboratories Inc are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Inc DTS and DTS Digital Surround amp are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Universal Serial Bus USB memory if so equipped This system supports various USB memory sticks USB hard drives and iPod players There Copyright and trademark are some USB devices which may not be sup ported with this system The technology protected by the U S patent and other intellectual property Make sure that the USB device is connected rights owned by Mac
415. place the ignition switch in the ON position and then to the LOCK position Low fuel warning This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it Is convenient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small re serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty Low windshield washer fluid warning This warning illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level Add windshield washer fluid as necessary See Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual No key warning This warning illuminates following two condi tions 1 When the ignition switch is pushed and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system If this warning illuminates you can not start the engine Check for the following causes and perform the assigned remedies The battery of the Intelligent Key carried with you is discharged completely Re place the battery with a new one The Intelligent Key carried with you is not registered to the system Use the regis tered Intelligent Key You do not have an Intelligent Key with you Carry an Intelligent Key with you 2 When the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position A chime will also sound Parking brake warning This warning illuminate
416. placing jack OF 40O T ie Fl Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire AWARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is nec essary to work under the vehicle sup port it with safety stands Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change 6 6 Incase of emergency Use the correct jack up points Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary Never use blocks on or under the jack Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack It may cause the vehicle to move This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack Never run the engine with a wheel s off the ground It may cause the vehicle to move by hand Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc tions 1 Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground 2 Place the jack directly under the
417. play Release the button 2 Find your current location on the zone map Refer to the illustration t 3 Press the N button repeatedly to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the display Once you have selected a zone number the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds NOTE Use zone number 5 for Hawaii Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function If the correct direction is not shown follow this procedure 1 With the display turned on press and hold t the N for about 10 seconds The C icon in the compass display will illuminate 2 Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH 8 km h 3 After completing the circles the display should return to normal A CAUTION Do not install a ski rack antenna etc which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the op eration of the compass When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Instruments and controls 2 9 WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS ABS or Anti lock Braking System ABS A Seat belt warning light and chime O High beam indicator light blue warning light ing li 3 Supplementa
418. played the album cover art can be displayed on the screen To toggle this feature on or off touch the Display Album Cover Art key When the feature is activated the amber indica tor next to the word ON will illuminate Artist XXXAXXXXX Album XXXXAXXXX Track XXXXXXXX Folder Track CD DVD or USB with compressed audio files While listening to a CD or compressed audio files certain text might be able to be displayed when CD encoded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or compressed audio files are encoded the following text might be displayed Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name Some of this text might not display while playing a regular CD FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM band select Pressing the FM AM button will change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM When the FM AM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON If a compact disc is playing when the FM AM button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last
419. quire that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Booster seat installation A CAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety Child Restraint and Booster Seats sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat 1 37 WRS0699 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position Position the booster seat on the seat Only place it in a front facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions LRSO0454 Front passenger position The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint or headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit If the head restraint or head rest is removed store it ina secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the booster seat is re moved See Head restraints or Adjust able headrests in this se
420. r cap is loose or missing or If the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank After a few driving trips the ENGINE light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys tem inspection maintenance test See Readi ness for inspection maintenance I M test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual Operation The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways Malfunction indicator light on steady An emission control system and or CVT mal function has been detected Check the fuel filler cap If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and con tinue to drive the vehicle The S84F light should turn off after a few driving trips If the KF light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction indicator light blinking An en gine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To re duce or avoid emission control system dam age do not driv
421. r get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck A CAUTION When towing make sure that the trans mission axles steering system and powertrain are in working condition If any of these conditions apply dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used e Always attach safety chains before towing In case of emergency 6 11 For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual ACE0511 SCE0199A TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving front wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated 6 12 Incase of emergency A CAUTION When towing CVT models with the front wheels on the ground dollies must be used or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck e Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground forward or backward as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission If it is nec essary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels When towing with the front wheels on towing dollies Place the ignition switch to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device For VEHICLE RECOVERY freeing a stuck models with a steering wh
422. r passenger s side temperature but ton is pressed the DUAL indicator will come on To turn off the passenger s side tempera ture control push the DUAL button Heating A C OFF The air conditioner does not activate When you need to heat only use this mode 1 Push the A C button A C OFF will be dis played and A C indicator will turn off 2 Operate the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature Otherwise the sys tem may not work properly Not recommended if windows fog up Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Push the ey front defroster button on The indicator light on the button will come on 2 Operate the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature 4 42 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows use the fan speed control dial to set the fan speed to maximum e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean push the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode When the Y front defroster button is pushed the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C The air recirculate mode auto matically turns off allowing o
423. r tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially re duced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never ex ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS A CAUTION Tire chains cables should not be installed on P245 40VR19 size tires Installation of the tire chains cables on P245 40VR19 size tires will cause damage to the ve hicle If you plan to use tire chains cables
424. re size 4 XXX XXXX t t 5 6 WDI0396 Three digit code Tire type code Optional Three digit code Date of Manufac ture Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For ex ample the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire 3 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufactur ers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others 4 Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible in flation pressure 5 Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car ried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in stalled tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an in ner tube tube type or not tubeless Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 7 The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other Tire related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this
425. re to learn the specific sounds of your voice See Speaker ad aptation function in this section Alternate Command Mode For advanced operation an Alternate Command Mode is provided This setting enables control of the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi tion to additional commands for the Phone and Navigation systems With this setting active the system does not announce or display the avail able commands at each step When this mode is activated the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options Minimize Voice Feedback Reduces the amount of the information spoken for each voice instruction Settings gt Voice Recognition 8 00 Command List Q User Guide Speaker Adaptation Alternate Command Mode e on Minimize Voice Feedback Change the mode of Voice Recognition LHA1341 SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION The Voice Recognition system has a function to learn the user s voice for better voice recognition performance The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons Having the system learn the user s voice 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel select the Others key on the display 2 Select the Voice Recognition key 3 Select the Speaker Adaptation key Settings gt Speaker Adaptation 8 00 Learning result can be stored deleted edited 4 Select the user whose voice is to be memo rized by the system Monitor climate aud
426. rear window be careful not to scratch or dam age the rear window defroster Instruments and controls 2 27 O Uy REAR LIC1388 Type B NOTE The top few rows of wires on the rear win dow are not part of the rear window de froster system These wires make up the antenna for the audio system 2 28 Instruments and controls HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS if so equipped AWARNING Z HIGH VOLTAGE e When xenon headlights are on they produce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disassemble Always have your xe non headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head lights If they are not correctly aimed they might temporarily blind an oncom ing driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident If headlights are not aimed correctly immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly When the xenon headlight is initially turned on its brightness or color varies slightly However the color and brightness will soon stabilize The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on off opera tion It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals for example when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out the brightness will drasti cally decre
427. ries to save in the vehicle Ne eny 1 phonebook C nroa k INFORMATION Delete Number XXX XXXX e Copy from the Handset l OAKA The system will show your cell phone s jve wW i F phonebook that was downloaded depend Voicetag wh ing on your phone s compatibility You may 2 5 select one of these entries to save in the vehicle phonebook e Editing the Vehicle Phonebook 4 Select the desired item to change 1 Push the PHONE button and select the Ve The following editing items are available hicle Phonebook key Entry 2 Select the desired entry from the displayed Changes the displayed number of the se list lected entry 3 Select the Edit key e Name Edit the name of the entry using the keypad displayed on the screen Number Edit the phone number using the keypad displayed on the screen Type Select the icon from the icon list 4 138 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voicetag Confirm and store the voicetag Voicetags allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more information see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section To delete an entry select the Delete key at step 3 HANDSET PHONEBOOK Many phones will support an automatic down load of the cellular phone s phonebook Since this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be stored and entries are automatically assigned voice tags by the system this
428. ring should not be modified or disconnected Unautho rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system e A cracked windshield should be re placed immediately by a qualified re pair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual ab ay S J ME Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out of position occu pants However all of the information cau tions and warnings in this manual still ap ply and must be followed The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted They may not inflate in cer tain side collisions Vehicle damage or l
429. ription is active Satellite ra E5 2 3 4 5 6 dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii FE and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH CD DVD FM AM SAT DISC AUX gt PLAYER if so equipped RPT SEEK AS For all operation precautions see Audio opera SCAN RDM i CAT TRACK e i USH WS tion precautions in this section Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off 1 amp CD eject button 6 TRACK button 9 VOL ON OFF control knob 7 SEEK CAT button To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF 3 Station select 1 6 buttons 8 SAT button control knob 4 TUNE FOLDER and AUDIO control 9 RPT RDM button Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the knob Bass Treble Fade and Balance 10 SCAN button volume 5 DISC AUX button 11 FM AM button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 75 This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driv ing speed changes AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Bal ance and Fade Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Balance Fade To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in th
430. riveability problems such as engine stall ing and difficult hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Technical and consumer information 9 3 Take care not to spill gasoline during refu eling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 in your vehicle U S government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injec tor cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers etc which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine 9 4 Technical and consumer information Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If se vere this can lead to engine damage If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when us
431. rovision correctly into the USB connector Corporation and other right holders is Do not force the memory stick or USB cable adopted for this system into the USB connector 4 52 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the humidity If this occurs remove the USB memory stick and dehumidify or ventilate the player com pletely The player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high Decrease the temperature before use Do not leave the USB memory in a place prone to static electricity or where the air conditioner blows directly The data in the USB memory may be damaged Prepare the USB device by yourself be cause It is not equipped with the vehicle The USB device cannot be formatted with this system If you want to format the USB memory use your personal computer Partitioned USB devices may not be played correctly Some characters used in other languages Chinese Japanese etc are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen NISSAN recommends using English lan guage characters with USB devices Do not connect the USB device if the con nector or cable is wet Allow the cable and or connectors to dry completely before connecting the USB device Large video podcast files cause slow re sponses in the iPod The vehicle center display may momentarily black out but it will
432. rt 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb if so equipped AWARNING Z HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on they pro duce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disas semble Always have your xenon head lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Headlight and turn signal switch in the Instru ments and controls section Replacing the halogen headlight bulb if so equipped The headlight is a semi sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight halogen bulb Be cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement see your NISSAN dealer A CAUTION Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb When aiming adjustment is necessary contact a NISSAN dealer e Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time Dust moisture smoke etc entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed
433. rting we ce eed ee Ea BRE Reale 6 8 K Keyfob battery replacement 8 24 Keyless entry With Intelligent Key system See Intelligent Key system 3 13 Keys For Intelligent Key system 3 2 L Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 11 C M V S S certification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 10 Engine serialnumber 9 10 F M V S S certification label 9 10 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Warning labels for SRS 1 53 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SyS s as a Ai deh oe he ee ee le a a 1 23 License plate Installing the license plate 9 11 Light Air bag warning light 1 53 2 14 Brake light See stop light 8 27 Bulb check instrument panel 2 10 Bulb replacement 8 27 Charge warning light 2 11 Fog light switch sa e se sos raas a aas 2 32 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 28 Headlight control switch 2 29 Headlights si a bw ay ce ee aa 8 26 Interior light s e s ob kaw aae a a a 2 50 Light DUIDS 2 6 40 p 4a Bek doe a 4 8 26 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low windshield washer fluid warning IGS ae e aaa n o a e E e oes 2 23 Passenger air bag and status light 1 48 Personal lighis lt seo s be ot os 2 51 Security indicator light 2 16 TRUGR M
434. rts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri marily to carry passengers and cargo Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drive train steering brak ing and other systems A NISSAN Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www nissanusa com This guide includes information on trailer towing ca pability and the special equipment required for proper towing 9 16 Technical and consumer information MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this sec tion The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight When towing a trailer load of 1 000 Ibs 454 kg or more trailers with a brake system must be used The Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using Improper towing equipment could ad versely affect vehicle handling braking and per formance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appro priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Temperature cond
435. ruments and controls VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driv ing conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The OPE indicator will come on Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See Vehicle Dy namic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving section POWER OUTLET LIC T3392 Front center console The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones They are rated at 12 Volt 120 W 10A maximum The power outlet in the front console box is powered directly by the vehicle battery The out let on the center console near the shift selector is powered only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position A CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use The power outlets are not designed for use with a cigarette lighter Do not use with accessories that ex ceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory Use power outlets with the engine run ning
436. s Select the Others key using the NISSAN con troller then select the Comfort key The Com fort settings screen will be displayed You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the desired item using the NISSAN controller The indicator light box at the right of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the item is touched or the ENTER button is pressed Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF Settings gt Comfort 8 00 Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Lift Steering Wheel on Exit Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit Off will activate all doors with one click Auto Interior Illumination Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked Light Sensitivity Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher right or lower left After selecting the item turn the NISSAN controller or touch the or key to change the setting Light Off Delay Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer After select ing the item turn the NISSAN controller or touch the or key to change the setting The available delays are O 30 45 60 90 120 150 and 180 seconds 4 28 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati cally according
437. s To view an image press the SETTING button and then select the Image Viewer key with the NISSAN controller The Image Viewer screen will be displayed A list of compatible images on the storage device is displayed on the left side of the screen while the selected image is displayed on the right side of the screen To choose a different picture from the list use the NISSAN controller to scroll through the list once the desired image is high lighted Select the Full Screen Display key and press the ENTER button to view a full screen version of the image Image requirements Image type JPEG File extensions jpg jpeg Maximum resolution 2048 x 1536 Maximum size 2 MB Colors 32 768 15 bit Maximum file name length 253 bytes dis play only shows first 8 characters Maximum folders 500 Maximum images per folder 1024 4 32 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 8 00 Settings Viewing images in a slideshow To view all of the images on the device in a slide show first enter the full screen mode while viewing one of the images The slideshow control buttons are located on the right side of the screen Select the play key to begin the slideshow The images shown on the screen will periodically change at a given interval of time To skip through the images without waiting for them to change automatically select the KI key to skip back wardorthe PR key to
438. s If the belt is in poor condition or is loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer Have the belt checked regularly for condi tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide SPARK PLUGS REPLACING SPARK PLUGS lridium tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace iridium tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer Fol low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Do not service iridium tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap ping e Always replace spark plugs with rec ommended or equivalent ones AWARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re move the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer for assistance AIR CLEANER ee A MY VZ The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Mainte nance Guide When replacing the filter wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth To remove the air cleaner filter push the tabs in the direction indicated and pull the unit upwards Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 AWARN
439. s 4 73 AUX auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the center console 1 NTSC compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary input jacks Audio devices such as some MP3 players can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden tification purposes Red right channel audio input White left channel audio input Yellow video input Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input jacks turn off the power of the portable device With a compatible device connected to the aux iliary input jacks press the AUX button until the AUX mode appears in the display The output from the device will be played through the display when the vehicle is in the P Park position and the parking brake engaged and audio system 4 74 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems AUX gt Menu Display Mode o AUX settings Select the Settings key using the NISSAN con troller and press the ENTER button Choose one of the display modes by selecting the 4 keyorthe Normal e Wide key Cinema No satellite radio reception is available when the SAT button is pressed to ac cess satellite radio stations unless op tional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio ser vice subsc
440. s made from the vehicle Incoming Use the Incoming command to list the incoming calls made to the vehicle Missed Use the Missed command to list the calls made to the vehicle that were not answered Connect Phone NOTE The Add Phone command is not available when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Connect Phone Add Phone A Select Phone Delete Phone Turn Bluetooth OFF Use the Connect Phone commands to manage the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth function on the vehicle Add Phone A Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to the vehicle See Connecting procedure in this section for more information Select Phone Use the Select Phone command to select from a list of phones connected to the vehicle The sys tem will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to select Only one phone can be active at a time Delete Phone Use the Delete Phone command to delete a phone that is connected to the vehicle The sys tem will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to delete Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also delete that phonebook for that phone Turn Bluetooth OFF Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a wireless connection to your phone SPEAKER ADAPTATION SA MODE Speaker Adaptatio
441. s no representations or warran ties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or cat egories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its online services at any time GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 109 USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Copyright Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technol ogy and related content delivery For more infor mation visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright
442. s on the CD USB device or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts playing before the music starts playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the Music cuts off or skips oe a specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like MP3 or when play is prohibited by copyright protection the next song when playing player will skip to the next song Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order Random Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 57 CD DVD or USB with Compressed Audio Files models with Navigation System The file types supported by this system are MP3 WMA AAC M4A and ATRACS Explanation of terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal a
443. s outside mirror will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles The auto matic anti glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The automatic anti glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle The indicator light on the automatic anti glare rearview mirror will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature Is on To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the O button on rearview mirror without compass Type B 3 28 Pre driving checks and adjustments the button on rearview mirror with compass Type The indicator light will turn off To turn on the automatic anti glare feature again press the button on rearview mirror without compass Type B the button on rearview mirror equipped with compass Type The indicator light will turn on For information on the automatic anti glare rear view mirror see Automatic anti glare rearview mirror in this section Reverse tilt down feature if so equipped The reverse tilt down feature will turn both out side mirror surfaces downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle when the small switch is in either the L or R position NOTE If the outside mirror control switch is in the neutral position neither mirror will turn downward when the shift selector is moved to R Reverse Move the shift sel
444. s played To view movies on the front display stop the vehicle in a safe location move the shift selector to the P Park position and apply the parking brake AWARNING The driver must not attempt to operate the DVD system or wear the head phones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to ve hicle operation Do not attempt to modify the system to display a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is being driven Doing so may distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death A CAUTION Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is running Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery e Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moisture such as spilled liq uids may cause the system to malfunction While playing VIDEO CD media this DVD player does not guarantee com plete functionality of all VIDEO CD formats 4 84 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Playing a DVD DISC AUX button Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while watching the images Press the DISC AUX button until the DVD mode is active on the display When a DVD is loaded it will be replayed auto matically The operation screen will be turned on when the DISC AUX button is pressed while a DVD is playing The operation screen wil
445. s several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks when a CD is being played 44 gt SEEK CAT and TRACK Rewind and Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT M4 rewind button or the TRACK PPI fast forward button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed TUNE FOLDER knob While playing a CD with compressed audio files turn the TUNE FOLDER knob right or left to play the next or previous folder Artist XXXAXXXXX Album XXXXAXXXX Track XXXXXXXX Folder Track CD menu Touch the Menu key on the display while a CD or CD with compressed audio files is playing to bring up a list of options Depending on the type of CD being played the following options may be available 4 80 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems CD gt Menu Play Mode This option allows you to alter the play pattern of the CD Touch the key of the mode you wish to apply The modes change the play pattern as follows 1 Track Repeat the current track is repeated 1 Disc Random tracks from the entire disc are played randomly 1 Folder Repeat c
446. s the disc name of the CD cur rently playing Track displays the name of the song on the CD currently playing Some of this text or modes might not display while playing a regular CD Select the Menu key with the NISSAN controller then select the Text key to display the text for the CD Press the BACK button to exit the CD text display screen FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM band select Pressing the FM AM button will change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM When the FM AM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON If a compact disc is playing when the FM AM button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception XM band select Pressing the AUX button will change the band as follows USB XM1 XM2 XM3 AUX USB satellite if so equipped Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 71 When the AUX button is pressed while the igni tion switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last
447. s when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven SHIFT P warning This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the shift selec tor in any position except in the P Park position If this warning illuminates the ignition switch is in the OFF position Move the shift selector to the P Park position or push the ignition switch to the ON position An inside warning chime will also sound If the shift selector is moved to the P Park position the Push warning will appear Refer to Push warning in this section For additional information about Intelligent Key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Engine start operation indicator This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF ACC or ON position with the shift selector in the P Park position This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the push button ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed Instruments and controls 2 23 NISSAN Intelligent Key insertion indica tor This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port For example the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged If this indicator illuminates insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct direction See Push button ignition switch in the Starting and driving
448. s with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER AWARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering ma neuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle As with any vehicle loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all times and avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including pre scription or over the counter drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do so Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or kille
449. se lower the cup holder lid and push down until it clicks in place The rear cup holders are located in the fold down armrest in the rear seat back LICO423 Rear To open the cup holders on the rear fold down armrest lift the cup holder lid To close lower the lid GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle Use the mechanical key when locking 4 or unlocking the glove box AWARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop Instruments and controls 2 39 CONSOLE BOX 2 40 Instruments and controls Upper half Pull up on the driver s side latch to open the upper half of the console box The upper half of the console box may be used for storage of cellular phones An access hole is provided at the front of the upper half of the console box for a phone or iPod cord routing to the power outlet Lower half Pull up on the lever to open the lower half of the console box A power outlet is located inside the console box and there is storage for compact discs The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while the vehicle is in motion ZA JEEN H A TT Pe ee TA D ZY ERTES SENISELE NS RHI NSE SRRY va B a SSS LICO748 WIC1032 GROCERY HOOKS CARGO NET if so equipped The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and can be used to hang a standard size plastic AWARNING grocery bag e Properly secure all c
450. seconds and then turns off If the light comes on while the engine is stopped it may not be possible to free the steering lock or to start the engine If the light comes on while the engine is running you can drive the vehicle How ever in these cases contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Kh Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened Instruments and controls 2 13 The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger s seat is occupied For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger Refer to Seat belts in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage 2 Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is
451. sed to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid 6 10 Incase of emergency PUSH STARTING A CAUTION e CVT models cannot be push started or tow started Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage e Do not push start this vehicle The three way catalyst may be damaged IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading or if you feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps AWARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury e Do not open the hood if steam is com ing out 1 Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the shift selector to P Park Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood If steam or cool ant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engi
452. selected The audio system is turned off The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the M4 SEEK CAT button while a track is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the PPI TRACK button while a track is playing to skip to the beginning of the next track If you press and hold the 44 SEEK CAT re wind button or the PPI TRACK fast forward button for more than approximately 1 5 seconds the track will play while rewinding or fast forward ing When the 4 SEEK CAT rewind button or the PPI TRACK fast forward button is re leased the track will return to the normal playing speed The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks Music Box gt Menu For more information on how to use the NISSAN controller see How to use the NISSAN control et in this section TUNE FOLDER knob i Normal The TUNE FOLDER knob skips from album to ui Normal album unless it is playing All Songs from the Music Library menu When playing All Songs the TUNE FOLDER knob changes the track in 1 6 stead of the album The upper right corner of the screen indicates if the TUNE FOLDER knob is changing by track or album Music Box menu There are some options available during play back Select the Menu key then select one of the following that are displayed on the screen if necessary Refer to the following information for each it
453. selector rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession Starting and driving 5 15 When canceling the manual shift mode Return the shift selector to the D Drive position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode In the manual shift mode the transmis sion may not shift to the selected gear This helps maintain driving perfor mance and reduces the chance of ve hicle damage or loss of control In the manual shift mode the transmis sion may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the en gine speed is too high When the ve hicle speed decreases the transmis sion automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop CVT operation is limited to automatic drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex tremely low even if manual shift mode is selected This is not a malfunction When CVT fluid warms up manual mode can be selected When the CVT fluid temperature is high the shift range may upshift in lower rom than usual This is not a malfunction 5 16 Starting and driving 3 4 Shift lock release 5 If the battery charge is low or discharged the shift selector may not be moved from the P Park 6 position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift selector button pushed It will be necessary to jump start or have your 7 battery charged see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section Contact your NI
454. sengers in a sudden stop or collision The child restraint must be used and installed properly Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Infants and children should never be held on anyone s lap Even the stron gest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front seat see Forward facing child restraint in stallation using the seat belts later in this section Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An inflating air bag could seri ously injure or kill a child A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses A child restraint with a top tether strap should n
455. set driver s and front passenger s side temperature using each temperature control dial When the DUAL button or passenger s side temperature dial is turned the DUAL indicator will come on To turn off the passenger s side temperature control push the DUAL button Heating A C OFF The air conditioner does not activate When you need to heat only use this mode 1 Push the A C button A C OFF will be dis played and A C indicator will turn off 2 Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature Otherwise the sys tem may not work properly Not recommended if windows fog up Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Push the ey front defroster button on The indicator light on the button will come on 2 Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows use the fan speed control dial to set the fan speed to maximum e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean push the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode When the Y front defroster button is pushed the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C The air recirculate mode auto
456. signed to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B and C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and exces sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law AWARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading ei ther separately or in combination can cause heat build up and possible tire failure EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties For USA 1 Emission Defects Warranty 2 Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive
457. sion 4 58 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e ID3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist album title encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album Artist Track title line on the display Windows Windows Media and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and or other countries Playback order Music playback order of a CD DVD or USB device with compressed audio files is as illus trated The folder names of folders not containing compressed audio files are not shown in the display f there is a file in the top level of the disc USB Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software so the files might not play in the desired order FOLDER COMPRESSED AUDIO FILES WHA1374 Playback order chart Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 59 Specification chart Supported media CD CD R CD RW DVD ROM DVD R DVD RW DVD R DL USB 2 0 CD CD R CD RW DVD ROM DVD R DVD RW DVD R DL ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista
458. soon recover If the iPod automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode the vehicle center display may momentarily black out but it will soon recover Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod The iPod nano 1st Generation may re main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation In this case please manually reset the iPod The iPod nano 2nd Generation will con tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon nected during a seek operation An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod nano 2nd generation lf you are using an iPod 8rd Generation with Dock connector do not use very long names for the song title album name or artist name to avoid the iPod resetting Itself iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Bluetooth streaming audio if so equipped Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be recognized by the in vehicle audio system It is necessary to set up the wireless con nection between a compatible Bluetooth audio device and the in vehicle Bluetooth module before using the Bluetooth audio Operating procedure of the Bluetooth au dio will vary depending on the devices Make sure how to operate your audio device be fore using it with this system The Bluetooth audio may be stopped under the foll
459. stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section WRS0256 Rear facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats 1 Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer s instructions 1 28 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0761 Rear facing step 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing LRSO669 Rear facing step 3 3 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted LRS0670 WRS0762 Rear facing step 4 Rear facing step 5 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the 5 Remove any additional slack from the seat shoul
460. system control buttons refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual For information on the PHONE button see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will discharge the battery and the engine will not start Reference symbols ENTER button This is a button on the control panel Example Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display These keys can be selected by touching the screen or using the NISSAN controller HOW TO USE THE NISSAN CONTROLLER Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on the display screen Highlight an item on the dis play using the main directional buttons 2 cer tain Navigation System functions use the addi tional directional buttons or the center dial 3 Then press the ENTER button C to select the item or perform the action The BACK button 4 has two functions e Go back to the previous display cancel Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 17 If you press the BACK button during setup the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen Finish setup In some screens pressing the BACK button 4 accepts the changes made during setup For the VOICE button functions refer t
461. t tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition switch has been placed in the ON or START position In this case the preten sioner system may not function properly It must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 SRS Air Bag Warning Labels located on the sun visors SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air light displaying AF in the instrument panel moni tors the circuits of the supplemental front impact air bag front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems The monitored circuits include the Air bag Control Unit ACU crash zone sensor sat elltte sensors occupant classification system front air bag modules side air bag modules curtain air bag modules pretensioners and all related wiring bag warning 1 53 When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds
462. t of you Ultimately the driver is respon sible for safety Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa tion section of this manual For detailed information see Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre vent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip pery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down De press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will oper ate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles A WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping distances Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydrau
463. t Off Delay HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis play screen in menus Whenever a menu selec tion is made or menu item is highlighted different areas on the screen provide you with important information See the following for details 1 Header Shows the path used to get to the current screen for example press the SETTING button gt then select the Comfort key 2 Menu Selections Shows the options to choose within that menu screen for example Auto Interior Illu mination etc 3 Up Down Movement Indicator Shows that the NISSAN controller may be used to move up or down on the screen and select more options 4 Screen Count Shows the number of menu selections avail able for the current menu even if they are on multiple pages for example 1 9 5 Footer Information Line Provides more information if available about the menu selection currently high lighted for example Cabin lighting when unlocking doors HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTON The STATUS button is used to display system information Three different split screens of infor mation are available Press the STATUS button multiple times to cycle through these screens as follows Audio with Turn Information for Navigation Audio with Fuel Economy Information Audio with Climate Control Information Audio with Turn Information for Navigation 4 20 Monitor climate audio phone and v
464. t allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to Do not lean against the door extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations A WARNING When sitting in the rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bag inflates you may be seriously injured Be especially careful with children who should always be properly restrained Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations e Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks They may interfere with side air bag inflation 1 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 45 1 Roof mounted curtain side impact 4 Air bag Control Unit ACU supplemental air bag inflators 5 Supplemental front impact air bag 2 Roof mounted curtain side impact modules supplemental air bags 6 Crash zone sensor 3 Front seat mounted side impact 7 Occupant classification system control supplemental air bag modules unit 1 46 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 8 Seat belt buckle switches for driver s and passenger s side 9 Occupant classification sensor pattern sensor 10 Seat belt with pretensioner 11 Side satellite sensor NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System front seats This vehicle is equipped with t
465. t check locations 5 0 8 EXIGHOr EE E E coeneyeds 0 4 Warning indicator lights n snau n naana aurrenean 0 9 Passenger compartment 0c cece e eee ees 0 5 AIR BAGS SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS a he gt Y N iD A 5 2N As W 0 2 Illustrated table of contents ae a a d 11 12 Top tether strap anchor P 1 35 Adjustable headrest P 1 10 Rear seat belts P 1 13 Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag P 1 39 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bags P 1 39 Head Restraints P 1 7 Front seat belts P 1 13 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 39 Seats P 1 2 Occupant classification sensor pattern sensor P 1 46 Seat belts with pretensioners P 1 52 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system P 1 23 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details EXTERIOR FRONT N D a pa Engine hood P 3 18 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 26 Windshield P 8 19 Moonroof if so equipped P 2 45 Power windows P 2 42 Door locks NISSAN Intelligent Key keys request button P 3 4 3 2 3 2 3 2 Mirrors P 3 25 Tire pressure P 8 31 Flat tire P 6 2 Tire chains P 8 39 Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 28 Replacing bulbs P 8 29 Fog light switch if so equipped P 8 26 See the page number indicated in paren theses
466. t de tect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving For more details refer to Low tire pres sure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire pressure informa tion in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Flat tire in the In case of emergency section Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures including the spare often and always prior to long dis tance trips The recommended tire pres sure specifications are shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures should be checked regularly because e Most tires naturally lose air over time Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds Set the tire pressure to the normal cold tire inflation pressure when the vehicle speed or load is reduced Incorrect tire pressure including un der inflation may advers
467. t of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER button is pressed Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 13 Selective Door Unlock Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 8 00 UP Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit Return All Settings to Default 5 9 DOWN i Off will activate all doors with one click Auto Interior Illumination Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked Auto Headlights Sensitivity Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher right or lower left Auto Headlights Off Delay Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from O 30 45 60 90 120 150 and 180 second periods Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati cally according to the vehicle speed Selective Door Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute When this item is turned to off all the doors will be unlocked
468. t stations XM if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to go to the next or previous category Press the ENTER button to show the XM Menu iPod if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Press the ENTER button to show the iPod Menu CD Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number if playing compressed audio files Press the ENTER button to show the CD Menu DVD if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the title number Press the ENTER button to select an item from the DVD display When the transparent operation menu ap pears the switch will control the menu USB if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number Press the ENTER button to show the USB Menu Music Box if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the album
469. tem is turned to ON you can have the system learn the voice commands in succession without selecting commands one by one TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number one until the problem is resolved Displays COMMAND NOT RECOG Ensure that the command format is valid see Standard Mode command list or Alternate Command Mode command list in this NIZED or the system fails to interpret section the command correctly Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defrost on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored See Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation wrong voicetag in the phonebook System in this section 2 Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag The system consistently selects the 1 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 167 MEMO 4 168 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and dr
470. tes have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz ing the use of non genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty These laws help pro tect you so you can take action to protect your self It s your right If you should need further information visit us at www nissanusa com for U S customers or www nissan ca for Canadian customers 10 Index A Air bag See supplemental restraint system bin ws cb ee ee ek ee we 1 39 Air bag system Front See supplemental front impact airbagsystem 05 1 46 Air bag warning light 1 53 2 14 Air cleaner housing filter 8 17 Air conditioner Air conditioner service 4 48 Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations 9 6 Heater and air conditioner controls 4 24 aaa bw 4 42 4 45 Rear seat air conditioner 4 47 Servicing air conditioner 4 48 Alarm system See vehicle security system 2 24 Anchor point locations 1 25 AMENDA s a naes eS aaa a A 4 117 Anti lock brake warning light 2 10 2 11 Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 23 PUI CSlO 4 4 eos ew eS ce 4 Cae wo RS 1 7 Audible reminders 4 2 16 Audio system 2 66 a ae kek Ok we 4 48 Bluetooth audio 4 110 Compact Disc CD changer 4 66 Compact disc CD player 4 72 4 79 FM AM radio wi
471. th compact disc CD CWANOCl ssh a hae mae aw mia ee a a 4 64 FM AM SAT radio with CD DVD player 4 75 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD Player ne tw Fe oe Ge Se Se Ge 4 69 Audio System iPod Player ia debe wom was 4 92 4 93 Music Box hard disk drive audio VSTO owe ok aoe hoe gerd ge oe alg 4 97 4 102 Audio system POCO 2446 8 4 od E EE E EE 4 48 Rear audio controls 4 116 Audio System SCUINGS 446 ewe bebe ded d 4 70 4 76 Audio system Steering wheel audio control switch 4 114 USB interface 4 87 4 88 Autolight switch 04 2 30 Automatic Automatic drive positioner 3 29 Automatic power window switch 2 44 Automatic transmission position indicator NGA o 0 4 4 eee SAA 2 Sk eee 2 14 Transmission shift selector lock release 5 16 Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 25 Automatic door locks 3 6 AUX jack 6 ae so eh eee a 4 68 B Battery dae eo Haw bee eR oe eA 8 14 Charge warning light 2 11 Before starting the engine 5 10 Belt See drive belt 8 16 Block heater ENGINS a Suet So hook Ge We ae oe Se a 5 27 Bluetooth audio 5 ati ok we aw ae we elem ow 4 110 Bluetooth hands free phone system 4 118 4 133 Booster seats ah we eb a 1 36 Brake Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 23 Brake fluid gt s s daw ee oo ew ae 8 12 Brake light See stop light 8 27
472. that could cause death or serious personal injury To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed precisely A CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder ate personal injury or damage to your ve hicle To avoid or reduce the risk the pro cedures must be followed carefully If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen o If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra tion it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle GC 5 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action s t Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium batter ies may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov h
473. the PHONE button on the panel instrument panel to hang up If any other one of the procedures listed below 2 Select one of the following options to make a call screen is currently displayed press the c Press the phone button onthe steering Vehicle Phonebook Select the name from PHONE button to display the Call in wheel switches an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook Progress screen first then press the PHONE button again to hang up There are some options available when receiving Handset Phonebook Select the name from a call Select one of the following displayed on an entry stored in the handset phonebook the screen 4 140 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Answer Accept an incoming call to talk Hold Call Put an incoming call on hold Reject Call Reject an incoming call To finish the call follow one of the procedures listed below a Select the Reject Call key on the display b Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel c Press and hold the phone buttononthe steering wheel switches o mmu 8 00 Call in Progress Y 0 04 Use Handset f XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX DURING A CALL There are some options available during a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen if necessary Hang up Finish the call Use Handset Transfer the call to the cellular phone Mute Mute your voice to the person Keypad Brings u
474. the hands free phone system Select the No key Settings gt Connect Bluetooth 8 00 Start connecting your Bluetooth Audio device The PIN is 0000 Please input passkey LHA1351 5 Enter a PIN of your choice It will be needed by your Bluetooth audio device to com plete the connection process See the Bluetooth audio device s owner s manual for more information Bluetooth Audio Bo m 8 00 Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth audio mode is displayed on the screen The controls for the Bluetooth audio are dis played on the screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 111 Settings gt Bluetooth o MDYa 8 00 Settings gt Connect Devic Do Mika 8 00 Settings gt Audio Player o Mma 8 00 Bluetooth XXXXXXXX Handsfree Phone Audio Player XXXXXXXX Bluetooth audio settings 4 Select the Audio Player key 5 A list of the connected Bluetooth audio players is displayed Select the name of the To adjust the Bluetooth audio settings follow device you wish to edit the procedure below 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Bluetooth key 3 Select the Connected Devices key 4 112 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems A new disc may be rough on the inner and Settings gt audio Player o MYu 8
475. the lock knob and push the headrest down Cd LRS0890 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable headrests A O N Pull the headrest up to the highest position Push and hold the lock knob Remove the headrest from the seat Store the headrest properly so it is not loose in the vehicle Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating posi tion 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Install 1 Align the headrest stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the headrest is facing the correct direction The stalk with the ad justment notches Q must be installed in the hole with the lock knob Push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down Properly adjust the headrest before an oc cupant uses the seating position SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive even if your seating position includes a supple mental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being
476. the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pres sure gauge to check the tire pressure For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The light will remain on after the 1 minute Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Main tenance and do it yourself section in this manual AWARNING If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch in the ON position have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and in crease the likelihood of tire failure Se rious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could re sult in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tir
477. the manual shift gate Ds Drive Sport mode M Manual mode can be selected by mov ing the shift selector up or down or using the shift paddles if so equipped up or down In M mode the transmission will produce noticeable upshifts and down shifts The position indicator in the meter shows a M Temporary M Manual shift mode With the shift selector in the D Drive mode and if the shift paddle is moved up or down the transmission will temporarily switch to the M Manual mode If the shift paddles are not used after 5 10 seconds the transmission will return to the D Drive mode Tocancel the M Manual mode and return to the D Drive mode press and hold either shift paddle for 3 5 seconds Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment NOTE Engine power may be automatically re duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector into a driving gear 3 Release the foot brake then gradually start the vehicle in motion 4 Stop the vehicle completely before shifting the shift selector to the P Park position The CVT is designed so the
478. the opera tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury A CAUTION Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar material Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish Never use fabric protectors unless rec ommended by the manufacturer e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may dam age the lens cover AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions Hanging type air fresheners can cause per manent discoloration when they contact ve hicle interior surfaces Place the air fresh ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the vents These products can cause imme diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s in structions before using the air fresheners FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior No matter what mats are used be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positione
479. the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 Checking tire pressure 1 Remove the valve stem cap from the tire Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side ways or air will escape If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage 3 Remove the gauge 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Add air to the tire as needed If too much air is added press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed 6 Install the valve stem cap Check the pressure of all other tires including the spare Front Original Tire Rear Original Tire Spare Tire Temporary Size Cold Tire Inflation Pres sure P245 45VR18 230 kPa 33 PSI P245 40VR19 230 kPa 33 PSI P245 40WR19 230 kPa 33 PSI WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information iden tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro vides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certif
480. tify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 NISSAN 1 Technical and consumer information 9 25 READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces your vehicle may be re quired to be in what is called the ready condi tion for an Inspection Maintenance I M test of the emission control system The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a powertrain system Component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle s inspection maintenance test readiness condi tion Turn the ignition switch ON without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the I M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a not ready con dition drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you 9 26 Technical and consumer information AWARNING Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
481. tion 1 Push the PHONE button and select the Ve hicle Phonebook key Settings gt Edit Vehicle Pho 9o MI Ful 8 00 Copy from Call History Copy from the Handset Enter Number by Keypad LHA1321 2 Select the Add New key at the top of the screen Choose the method for entering the phone book entry For this example select Enter Number by Keypad Enter the digits and select the OK key For more information see How to use the touchscreen in this section Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook o dH Yul Gack Entry Name Number XXX XXXX Type Voicetag 5 5 Select the Voicetag key to record a name to speak when using the Voice Recognition system Select the Store key and prepare to speak the name after the tone When the voicetag is successfully saved amp select the OK key to save the phonebook entry After the phonebook entry is saved it will show a screen that Is ready to call the num ber Press the BACK button to return to the Vehicle Phonebook Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 137 Copy from Call History The system will show a list of your incoming Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook Bo ill Fut 8 00 Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook o dill Yul acr outgoing or missed calls that were down loaded from your cell phone depending on your phone s compatibility You may select one of these ent
482. tion TUNE FOLDER Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to the right or left 44 gt SEEK CAT and TRACK tuning buttons Press the SEEK CAT 4 button or the TRACK gt gt button to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station 1 to 6 Station memory operations Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 and six stations can be set for the AM band 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the AM FM select button 2 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 4 66 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Compact disc CD changer operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or
483. tion When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle To unlock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the unlock position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 Lockout protection When the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open all doors will lock and unlock automatically With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle not in the Intelligent Key port and any door open all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH 24 km h e All doors unlock automatically when the ig nition switch is placed in the OFF position The automatic unlock function can be de activated or activated To deactivate or acti vate the automatic door unlock system perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2 push and hold the power door lock switch to the amp position UNLOCK for more than 5 seconds 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments 4 When activated the hazard indicator will flash twice When deactivated the hazard indicator will flash once 5 The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and
484. tion ing system and will require the replace ment of all air conditioner system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth s ozone layer Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain government regula tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys tem service A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger ant Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model VQ35DE Type Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC Cylinder arrangement 6 cylinder V block Slanted at 60 Bore x Stroke in mm 3 760 x 3 205 95 5 x 81 4 Displacement cu in cm 213 45 3 498 Firing order 1 2 3 4 5 6 Idle speed CVT in N position Ignition timing degree B T D C at idle speed CO at idle Spark plug FXE22HR11 Spark plug gap Nominal in mm 0 043 1 1 No adjustment is necessary Camshaft operation Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES 002 Technical and consumer information 9 7 WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Wheel Overall length in mm 190 6 4 843 eels Overall width in mm 73 2 1 860 18x 8 0J Overall height in mm 57 8 1 467 Front Track 19 x 8 0J 18 inch tire in mm 62 4 1 585 Tires 19 inch tire in mm 62 4 1 585
485. to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a call back number does not exist the system announces There is no number to call back and ends the VR session During a call During a call there are several command options available Press the fa button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com mands Help The system announces the avail able commands Go back Correction The system an nounces Go back ends the VR session and returns to the call Cancel Quit The system announces Cancel ends the VR session and returns to the call Send Enter Call Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers or during a call For example if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system Say Send one two three four The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers The system then ends the VR ses sion and returns to the call Say star for Say pound for Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired The system announces Transfer call Call transferred to privacy mode The system then ends the VR session To reco
486. to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants earlier in this section NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certification or Interna tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval API service symbol Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certifica tion mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives The use of an oil additive is not neces sary when the proper oil type is used and main tenance intervals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper ated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil filter When re placing use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Ch
487. to learn the best way to transport your child There are three basic types of child restraint systems Rear facing child restraint Forward facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 Ibs 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Forward facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward facing child restraint AWARNING Infants and children need special protec tion The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fit ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or terri tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children See Child Re straints later in this section A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH Lower Anchor and Teth ers for CHildren system or with the vehicle seat belt See Child Restraints section for more in formation NISSAN recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat Stud
488. to the vehicle speed Selective Door Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within one minute When this item is turned to off all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Select to turn on or turn off the door lock unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch Lift Steering Wheel on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position the steering wheel moves to the previous position Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the driver s seat moving backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position the driver s seat moves to the previous position Return All Settings to Default Select to change all the comfort and convenience systems to their default settings Settings gt Language amp Units
489. tomati cally dims during night time conditions and ac cording to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you The automatic anti glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NOTE Do not hang any objects over the sensors or apply glass cleaner to the sensors Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors resulting in improper operation Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 For information on the compass display if so equipped see Compass display in the Instru ments and controls section of this manual WPD0446 Type A Type A The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operating With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi tion press the button as described To turn off the anti glare feature press the button The indicator light will turn off e To turn on the anti glare feature press the button again The indicator light will turn on 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments a TT Ife ie LPD0469 Type B Without compass Type B and Type C The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operating To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the O button for inside mirrors without compass e the button for inside mirrors with compass The indicator light will turn off LPD0470 Type C With compass To t
490. tor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Odometer Twin trio odometer Secon othe Manua Speedometer The odometer twin trip odometer is displayed oe when the ignition switch is placed in the ON The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed position The odometer 1 records the total distance the vehicle has been driven The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips 2 4 Instruments and controls THEE Qo linj TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo lutions per minute rom Do not rev the engine into the red zone 1 A CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone shift to a higher gear or reduce en gine speed Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera ture The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions A CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera ture near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature If the gauge is over the nor mal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible If the engine is over heated continued operation of the ve hicle may seriously damage the engine See
491. touchscreen to see a list of the presets in the AM FM1 or FM2 preset banks XM3 gt Favorite Artists None Add Current Artist None Add Current Artist 1 8 Menu XM if so equipped Select the Menu key using the NISSAN control ler or touchscreen to see a list of options Preset List Displays the list of presets Press and hold the touchscreen or ENTER button on the NISSAN controller to save a preset Customize Channel List deselect chan nels to skip while using the TUNE FOLDER knob Favorite Artist amp Songs Tags the current artist or song playing on XM as a favorite Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a favorite artist or song Is playing on XM The audio system must be playing XM radio for this feature to work Delete a favorite artist or song Categories Displays a category list for XM radio Select a category to select the first channel for that category Direct Tune Tune to a channel by entering the channel number Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical C
492. trol panel Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 33 REARVIEW MONITOR if so equipped When the shift selector is shifted into the R Reverse position the monitor display shows the view to the rear of the vehicle The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground AWARNING The rear view camera is a convenience but itis not a substitute for proper back ing up Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly Objects viewed in the RearView Moni tor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used Make sure that the trunk is securely closed when backing up e Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation e Do not put anything on the rear view camera The rear view camera is in stalled above the license plate When washing the vehicle with high pressure water be sure not to spray it around the camera Otherwise water may enter the camera unit causing wa ter condensation on the lens a mal function fire or an electric shock Do not strike the camera It is a preci sion instrument Otherwise it may mal function or cause damage resu
493. trunk will open HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft 10 m away from the vehicle The operating distance de pends upon the conditions around the vehicle The remote keyless entry function will not func tion under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely When the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged A CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle Ay a 1 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion WPD0359 Locking doors 2 Close all doors 3 Press the Key button on the Intelligent 4 The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once 5 All doors will be locked Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 A CAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles 3 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments Unlocking doors WPD0360 1 Press the if Key button on the Intelligent 2 The hazard warning lights flash once 3 Pressthe button again within 60 sec onds to unlock all doors All doors will be locked automatica
494. ttachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula VOICE COMMANDS tions Bluetooth Others You can use voice commands to operate various Operation is subject to the following two con Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System features l F 3 wy x Adjust navigation settings ditions using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition 1 This device may not cause interference and System in this section 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un CONNECTING PROCEDURE desired ti f the device Se eee eS 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru IC Regulatory information ment panel and select the Bluetooth key Operation is subject to the following two con on the display ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 135 Settings gt Bluetooth odim Yu 8 00 8 00 Bluetooth The system is searching for your phone Using your handset look Are you connecting a Bluetooth device to Connect Bluetooth y f g for a Bluetooth device called MY use with the handsfree phone system CAR When requested by the
495. udio files MP3 conversion of an audio track can reduce the file size by ap proximately 10 1 ratio Sampling 44 1 kHz Bit rate 128 kbps with virtually no percep tible loss in quality The compression re duces certain parts of sound that seem in audible to most people WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Mi crosoft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality AAC M4A Advanced Audio Coding AAC is a lossy audio compression format Audio files that have been encoded with AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver a higher quality of sound than MP3 ATRACS3 ATRACS3 Plus Adaptive Trans form Acoustic Coding ATRAC is a lossy audio compression format developed by Sony Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once is called a multises
496. uent checks of the battery fluid level 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold Engine drive belts Make sure the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected imme diately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks defor
497. ume of the voice feedback press the volume control switches or on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the f4 button on the steering wheel To use the system faster you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu For example press the 4 button and after the tone say Call Redial NOTE The combined command of Call and a Name cannot be used How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following rules and examples Either zero or oh can be used for 0 Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 121 NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty Example 1 555 1212 123 two hundred and One five five five one two one two star NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two one two three puna Say plus for available only when using Numbers can be spoken in small groups the Special Dialing c
498. unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like MP3 or when play is prohibited by copyright protection the next song when playing player will skip to the next song Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order Random Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 61 Compressed Video Files models with Navigation System Explanation of terms e DivX DivX refers to the DivX codec owned by Div Inc used for a lossy compres sion of video based on MPEG 4 e AVI AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave It is standard file format originated by Mi crosoft Corporation A divx encoded file can be saved into the avi file format for playback on this system if it meets the requirements stated in the table in this section However all avi files are not playable on this system since different encodings can be used other than the DivX codec ASF ASF stands for Advanced Systems Format It is file format owned by Microsoft Corporation Note Only asf files that meet the requirements stated in the table in this section can be played e Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital video files The size and quality of a compressed digital
499. ure of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi nate If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature check the tire pres sure for all four tires The Tire and Loading Information label also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label is located in the driver s door opening 5 4 Starting and driving For additional information see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section and Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the In case of emergency section AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for chan
500. ure to do so could result in damage to l l the charging system and cause personal 4 Connect the jumper cables in the sequence ley illustrated 1 If the booster battery is in another vehicle A CAUTION position the two vehicles to bring their bat EE are eee e Always connect positive to positive and negative to body ground for Do not allow the two vehicles to touch example strut mounting bolt engine lift bracket etc not to th ttery 2 Apply the parking brake Move the shift se ift bracket etc not to the battery lector to P Park Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems lights heater air condi tioner etc In case of emergency 6 9 e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 6 Keep the engine speed of the booster ve hicle at about 2 000 rpm and start the en gine of the vehicle being jump started A CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds If the engine does not start right away place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again 7 After starting the engine carefully discon nect the negative cable and then the positive cable 8 Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be sure to dispose of the cloth u
501. urn on the automatic anti glare feature again press the button for inside mirrors without compass the button for inside mirrors with compass The indicator light will turn on Some vehicles are also equipped with automatic anti glare outside mirrors For additional informa tion see Automatic anti glare outside mirrors in this section For information on HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver operation see the HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instruments and controls section of this manual For information on the compass display if so equipped see Compass display in the Instru ments and controls section of this manual OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch Is in the ACC or ON position Move the small switch 4 to select the right or left mirror Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 27 AWARNING e Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects e Do not adjust the mirrors while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Automatic anti glare outside mirrors if so equipped The driver
502. urn the system off press the VOL ON OFF 4 TUNE FOLDER and AUDIO control 9 RPT RDM button control knob knob Bass Treble Fade and Balance 10 SCAN button Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the 5 AUX button 11 FM AM button volume Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 69 This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driv ing speed changes AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Bal ance and Fade Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Balance Fade To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears If the control knob is not pressed for approxi mately 10 seconds the radio or CD display will automatically reappear Settings 8 00 Up Display Switch Beeps Camera Clock 1 6 Down i Adjust tone amp advanced audio settings Speed Sensitive Volume SSV To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5 press the SETTING button Then
503. utes then the 5 minute timer is reset To turn the autolight system off turn the switch to the OFF DAZ or position Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located on the top side of the instrument panel The autolight sen sor controls the autolight if it is covered the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position your vehicle s battery could be come discharged Headlight beam select To select the high beam function push the lever forward The high beam lights come on and the 20 light illuminates 2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam 3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the gt position the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes or 22 A CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time you should turn the head light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM Canada only The headlights automatically illuminate at a re duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights
504. utside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Turnthe 8 fan speed control dial to manually control the fan speed Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Push the amp gt air recirculation button to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle The C amp indicator light on the button will come on The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the Y front defrosting mode or the front defrosting and foot out let mode Fresh air intake Push the fresh air intake button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment The gt indicator light on the button will come on Automatic intake air control In the AUTO mode the intake air will be con trolled automatically To manually control the in take air push the S amp gt air recirculation button To return to the automatic control mode push and hold the 7 amp 2 air recirculation button or push and hold the fresh air intake button for about 2 seconds The indicator lights both air recirculation and fresh air intake buttons will flash twice and then the intake air will be con trolled automatically Air flow control Pushing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet Air flows from center and side vents 74 Air flows from center and sid
505. utton 12 SCAN button 13 AM FM button 14 DISP CLOCK button FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD CHANGER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions in this section Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode radio or CD that was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF control knob Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the volume AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Fade Balance and Beep Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Fade Balance Beep ON OFF Bass To adjust Bass Treble Fade and Balance press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears on the display Turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the TUNE FOLDER knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speak ers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers To change the Beep to ON or OFF turn the TUNE FOLDER knob left or right This will enable or disable the beep sound heard during menu selection Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or CD display r
506. ve under the influence of al cohol or drugs e ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro priate child restraint systems Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or per formance problems resulting from modi fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with out obligation IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways AWARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard
507. vent load shift while driving Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert ently becoming unlatched Avoid abrupt starts acceleration or stops Avoid sharp turns or lane changes 9 22 Technical and consumer information Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed When backing up hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so A CAUTION If you move the shift selector to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could occur 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal 2 Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels 3 After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab sorb the vehicle load 4 Apply the parking brake 5 Shift the transmission into P Park 6 Turn off the engine To drive away tk oR W N Start the vehicle Apply and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into gear Release the parking brake Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks 6 Apply and ho
508. ver some day to day and regular mainte nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN s good mechanical condition as well as its emis sions and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as general maintenance Is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance You are a vital link in the mainte nance chain Scheduled maintenance For your convenience both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day op eration They are essential for proper vehicle op eration It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by you a qualified technician or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN technicians are w
509. vere conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 A CAUTION e Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will by pass the variable voltage control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely e Use electrical accessories with the en gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator The current sensor A is located near the battery along the negative battery cable If you add elec trical accessories to your vehicle be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself DRIVE BELT Power steering fluid pump Generator Air conditioner compressor Crankshaft pulley PON gt AWARNING Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpectedly 1 Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear Cuts fraying or loosenes
510. volume of an incoming voice during a call by pushing the volume control switch on the steering wheel or by turning the volume control knob on the instrument panel NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM if so equipped NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands free operation of the systems equipped on this ve hicle such as phone and vehicle information There are two voice recognition modes of opera tion available They are Standard Mode e Alternate Command Mode In Standard Mode the factory default setting commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system You can complete your desired operation by simply following the prompts given by the system Not all NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available while in Standard Mode For advanced operation you can change to an Alternate Command Mode that enables the op eration of the display audio and climate control through NISSAN Voice Recognition When this mode is active an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pushing the TALK switch on the steering wheel and the voice com mand menu prompts are turned off In Alternate Command Mode the recognition success rate may be affected because the num ber of available commands and the ways of speaking each command are increased See NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com mand Mode in this section To improve the recognition success rate when Alternate Command Mode is active tr
511. w gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 7783 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pend ing Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trade marks of Gracenote MUSIC BOX HARD DRIVE AUDIO SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped The Music Box Hard Drive audio system can store songs from CDs being played The system has a 9 3 gigabyte GB storage capacity and can record up to 200 hours approximately 2 900 songs The following CDs can be recorded in the Music Box Hard Drive audio system CDs without compressed audio files Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio Hybrid CD DA specification in Super Audio CDs Compact Disc Digital Audio CD DA speci fication in CD Extras First session of multisession disc Extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C and above 158 F 70 C could affect the performance of the hard drive 4 102 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NOTE If the hard drive needs to be replaced due
512. warning light appears on the The ignition switch is placed in the OFF Move the shift selector to the P Park display and the outside chime sounds position and the shift selector is not in the P position continuously Park position When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or Carry the Intelligent Key with you knob placed in the LOCK position 3 seconds and all the doors unlock trunk The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or Carry the Intelligent Key with you trunk When pushing the door handle request The outside chime sounds for approximately A asor ie acicloccn cece Cee e deoreceual switch to lock the door 2 seconds y y The door handle request switch is pushed Push the door handle request switch after before the door is closed the door is closed i i i O the Intelligent K ith l When closing the trunk lid TAE E mi APPKA The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk 2 Me a a 10 seconds and the trunk lid opens Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 17 HOOD 1 Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel The hood will spring up slightly 2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood When closing the hood lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments AWARNING Make sure the ho
513. way from traffic if possible 5 Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle 6 Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING AWARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the bloodstream re duces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the severity of the injury NISSAN is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Al though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol Remember drinking and driving don t mix And that is true for drugs too over the counter pre scription and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco hol drugs or some other physical condition PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH AWARNING Do not operate the push button ignition switch while driving the vehicle e
514. xcept in an emergency The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu tive times in quick succession or the igni tion switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven this could lead to a crash and serious injury LSD0237 Type A When the ignition switch is pushed without de pressing the brake pedal the ignition switch po sition will illuminate as follows Push the ignition switch center once to change to ACC two times to change to ON three times to return to OFF The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position LSD2000 Type B The steering wheel is equipped with an anti theft steering lock device if so equipped The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to OFF until the shift selector is moved to the P Park posi tion When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to ward the OFF position proceed as follows 1 Move the shift selector into the P Park position 2 Push the ignition switch The ignition switch position will change to the ON position Starting and driving 5 7 3 The steering wheel lock if so equipped is designed to prevent steering in case of ve hicle theft The shift selector can be moved from the P Park position if the ignition switch is in the ON position an
515. y systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re moved If the head restraint was removed reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seat ing position Failure to follow these in structions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints All of the head restraints are adjustable A Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 LRS0888 Components Adjustment To raise the head restraint pull it up 1 Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level 2 Adustmentnotches with the center of the seat occupants ears 3 Lock knob 4 Stalks 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 4 LRS0889 To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Cd LRS0890 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable head restraints 1 Pull the head restraint up to the
516. y using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode See Speaker Adaptation Function in this section Otherwise it is recommended that Alter nate Command Mode be turned off and Standard Mode be used for the best recognition perfor mance While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys tem for certain Phone and Navigation features you can switch to using manual controls touch screen NISSAN controller steering wheel con trols and the information you have already en tered by voice control will be retained To switch to manual controls select the Manual Controls key on the display when it appears The system will respond by speaking Changing to manual operation Please use manual controls to con tinue For the voice commands for the navigation sys tem refer to the Navigation System Owner s Manual of your vehicle For vehicles in the U S the factory default setting is the Standard Mode See Standard Mode in this section For vehicles in Canada the factory default setting is the Alternate Command Mode See Alternate Command Mode in this section NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE The Standard Mode enables control of naviga tion phone and vehicle information With this setting active commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system Displaying user guide If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time or you do not
517. ynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has been turned off Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving sec tion of this manual The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on when you push the push button ignition switch to the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica tor light while you are driving have the Vehicle Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating but this is normal AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a disc brake pad requires replacement it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver s door is opened while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli gent Key port Make sure the ignition switch is placed in th
518. ystem Exhaust gases in the three way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants AWARNING The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys tem are very hot Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire A CAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re duce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants Keep your engine tuned up Malfunc tions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driv ing if the engine misfires or if notice able loss of performance or other un usual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three way catalyst e Do not race the engine while warming it up Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label located

FMI (V)GL36PN Indoor Fireplace User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents